JP6941382B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming board is used to encourage a player to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area (first gaming area) that is advantageous to the player in a normal gaming state. The provided image display device may display a display suggesting the direction of the gaming area (first gaming area) in which the player has an advantage.

In such a gaming machine, in the case of a normal gaming state, a gaming ball is played when the player is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state, jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A display suggesting the direction of the game area (first game area) in which the player has an advantage via the image display device when the flow of the game ball is detected in another game area (second game area) to be fired. (See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-208132

However, conventional gaming machines have not been able to sufficiently attract the interest of players (sufficiently increase their motivation to play).

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently attracting the interest of a player (sufficiently increasing the motivation to play).

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention makes a special determination to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired when the starting condition is satisfied, and the special determination is made. In a gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the determination becomes a special result, the holding storage means for storing the determination information as the holding storage, the normal gaming state, and the identification which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. The effect control means includes a game state control means that can be controlled to a game state, and an effect control means that performs a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol based on the result of the special determination. As the effect mode of the variation effect, it is possible to execute a normal mode and a specific mode in which the expectation of executing the special game is higher than that of the normal mode, and the specific mode is the determination. It is determined whether or not to execute based on the result of the preliminary determination performed according to the acquisition of the information, and based on the result of the preliminary determination, the advance notice effect of performing the predetermined effect during the execution of the variable effect is performed. It is possible to execute, and before the execution of the specific mode, it is possible to execute a precursor effect suggesting that the specific mode is executed, and the specific mode is executed during the execution of the specific mode. It is possible to execute the specific mode notification effect for notifying that the specific mode is being executed, and the precursor effect can be executed regardless of whether the specific mode is executed or not. The execution ratio of the specific mode differs between the case where the game is controlled to the normal game state and the case where the game is controlled to the specific game state, and the specific reach effect is expected to execute the special game during the execution of the variation effect. Is feasible, the effect symbol can be displayed in the first display mode in the normal gaming state, and the effect symbol can be displayed in the second display mode, which is less decorative than the first display mode, in the specific game state. It is displayable, wherein in the normal gaming state in a by running of the specific reach demonstration, Ri displayable der in lower display form decorative than the performance symbols the first display mode, the specific game state In the above, the effect symbol can be displayed in the second display mode, which is less decorative than the first display mode, and the specific reach effect is more than the first specific reach effect and the first specific reach effect. The first notice effect executed in the specific game state, including the second specific reach effect with a high expectation that the special game is executed, is the second display state. It is the advance notice effect that displays a specific image corresponding to the effect symbol displayed in the same manner and suggests the degree of expectation that the special game is executed depending on the type of the displayed specific image. The type includes at least a first specific image and a second specific image, and when the specific image displayed corresponding to the effect symbol is the second specific image, the second specific reach effect is executed. The second notice effect, which is possible and executed in the normal game state, is the degree of expectation that the special game is executed by displaying the hold image displayed according to the hold memory in any of a plurality of types. This is the advance notice effect that suggests that the number of types of the reserved image is larger than the number of types of the specific image, and the first specific reach effect is executed without executing the second advance notice effect. Further, the case where the first specific reach effect is executed after the second notice effect is executed is more likely to execute the special game .

According to the present invention, it is possible to sufficiently attract the interest of the player (sufficiently increase the motivation to play).

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a partial perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A-1) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, (a-2) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, and (b) is a diagram representing a reach determination table. .. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram representing a special symbol determination table for losing. (A) is a diagram showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table for a long hit game, and (c) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table for a short hit game. (A) is a diagram showing a game condition data determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination table in the time saving game state. (A) is a diagram representing a hit determination table for ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a diagram representing a normal symbol variation pattern determination table, and (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination. A figure showing a table, (e) is a figure showing an auxiliary game control table, and (f) is a figure showing a 2nd start opening opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area, and (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM. The figure which shows the structure, (d) is the figure which shows the structure of each storage part of the ordinary symbol hold storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the general control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the auxiliary game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the command analysis processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a start opening winning in an effect control board. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the effect information reservation storage area. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous notice effect determination table. It is a figure which shows the modification of the continuous notice effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead zone effect mode determination process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the final number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a zone precursor effect scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for execution of a look-ahead zone effect. (A) is a flowchart showing a continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process on the effect control board, and (b) is a flowchart showing a chance eye advance notice effect mode determination process on the effect control board. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a continuous step-up advance notice effect scenario determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a chance eye advance notice effect scenario determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a dialogue advance notice effect mode determination process on the effect control board, and (b) is a flowchart showing an effect advance notice effect mode determination process on the effect control board. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue advance notice effect scenario determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect advance notice effect scenario determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the icon change notice determination processing in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon change notice determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change notice / throwing kiss notice in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change notice in a time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the normal change notice in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the throwing kiss notice in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the dialogue count determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice. It is a figure explaining the normal aspect, the 1st special aspect and the 2nd special aspect 11-15, 21-23 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special aspect 11-15, 21-25, 31-35 which is the display mode of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special aspect 41-45, 51-55, 61-65 which is the display mode of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 4th special aspect 11-15, 21-24, 31, 41 which is the display mode of an icon. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information update process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process in an effect control board. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the chance eye notice, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the zone fanning effect, and (c) is for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (for effect mode A). It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for non-execution of a zone precursor effect and look-ahead zone effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect pattern determination table for execution of zone fanning failure effect 1, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect pattern determination table for execution of zone fanning failure effect 2. (C) is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect pattern determination table for execution of a zone fanning success effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for execution of the look-ahead zone effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B (high probability game state and time saving game state). It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode C (low probability game state and time saving game state). It is a flowchart which shows the accurate effect determination process in an effect control board. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the accuracy effect pattern determination table 1, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the accuracy effect pattern determination table 2. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead zone effect execution determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the icon change notice execution determination processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead zone effect end determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting display control processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows right-handed display control processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed display control processing in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the display example of the image display device in various game states. It is a figure which shows the production flow of the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows the state before the handshake event notice occurs. (A) is a diagram showing how the hold icon subject to the handshake event notice is displayed in the third special aspect 11, and (b) is the hold icon displayed before the hold icon subject to the handshake event notice. The figure showing how the display mode of is changed to the third special mode 31, (c) is a figure showing the appearance of the handshake event venue related to the handshake event notice, and (d) is the handshake character and escort related to the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows the appearance of a character. It is a figure which shows the state that the hold icon which is the object of the handshake event notice is waiting. It is a figure which shows the state that the hold icon which is the object of the handshake event notice is waiting. It is a figure which shows the state that the handshake event notice is being performed. It is a figure which shows the state that the handshake event notice is being performed. (A) is a diagram showing a state immediately before the end of the handshake event notice, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing a state after the end of the handshake event notice. It is a figure which shows the production flow of a throwing kiss notice. It is a figure which shows the mode that the hold icon changes from the normal aspect to the second special aspect 13. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is given, (b) is a figure showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the figure showing the character related to the throwing kiss notice targeting the heart. It is a figure which shows the state which flew toward an icon. (A) is a diagram showing how the heart hits the icon targeted for the throwing kiss notice, and (b) shows how the icon display mode is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a state after the notice of throwing kiss is completed. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is given, (b) is a figure showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the figure showing the character related to the throwing kiss notice targeting the heart. It is a figure which shows the state which flew toward an icon. (A) is a diagram showing how the heart hits the icon targeted for the throwing kiss notice, and (b) shows how the icon display mode is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a state after the notice of throwing kiss is completed. (A-1) is a time chart for explaining the production flow of the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead zone effect (when the zone fanning effect is executed with a 4-second fluctuation effect), and (a-2) is the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead effect. A time chart for explaining the effect flow of the zone effect (when the zone fanning effect is executed with the variation effect of 8 seconds), (b-1) is the display mode of the effect symbol in the zone fanning success effect (4 seconds variation effect). A time chart for explaining an example of (when the zone fanning success effect is executed), (b-2) shows the display mode of the effect symbol in the zone fanning failure effect 1 (the zone fanning failure effect 1 is a 4-second variation effect). A time chart for explaining an example of (in the case of execution), (c-1) shows the relationship between the stop of a special symbol and the change in the display mode of the icon (when the zone fanning success effect is executed with a 4-second fluctuation effect). (C-2) is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change in the display mode of the icon (when the zone fanning failure effect 1 is executed in the variation effect of 4 seconds). It is a time chart. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the state before the zone precursor effect is executed, and (c) and (d) are the states in which the zone precursor effect according to the third special aspect 41 is executed in the icon display mode. It is a figure which shows. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing how the icon display mode is executing the zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 4, and (c) is the icon display mode of the third special mode 5 and the third special mode. It is a figure which shows the state that the zone precursor effect by aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion aspect) is executed. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a zone precursor effect is executed in which the icon display mode is the third special mode 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode), and the look-ahead symbol constituting the zone fanning effect is temporarily stopped. In (b), the zone precursor effect is executed according to the third special aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) in which the icon is displayed, and the look-ahead symbol and the zone symbol constituting the zone fanning effect are temporarily stopped. A diagram showing the state, (c) shows that the zone precursor effect is executed according to the third special aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode), and the look-ahead symbol, zone symbol, and rush that constitute the zone fanning effect. It is a figure which shows the state that a symbol is temporarily stopped. In (a), the zone precursor effect is executed according to the third special aspect 2 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode) in which the icon is displayed, and the look-ahead symbol, zone symbol, and rush symbol that constitute the zone fanning effect are stopped. In the figures (b) and (c) showing the appearance of the icon, the zone notification effect is performed according to the third special aspect 3 (look-ahead zone notification effect mode), and the look-ahead zone indicates that the icon is in the look-ahead zone. It is a figure which shows the state that the zone background image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the zone notification effect is performed by the display mode of the icon by the 3rd special aspect 3 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode), and the look-ahead zone background image indicating that it is a look-ahead zone is displayed. .. (A) is a diagram showing how the icon display mode is performing the zone notification effect according to the third special aspect 3 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode), and (b) is the jackpot winning notification in the icon display mode. It is a figure which shows the state of being. It is a figure which shows the state that the continuous step-up notice production is performed. It is a figure which shows the state that the SP reach effect is performed after the continuous step-up notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the chance eye notice production is performed. It is a figure which shows the state that the dialogue notice production is performed. It is a figure which shows the state that the effect notice production is performed. It is a time chart in the case where the correct effect is performed during the variable effect and the pseudo correct light emission effect is performed at the same time as the start of the normal demo effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the production before the correct production is performed in the variation production. It is a figure which shows the production example when the accurate production is performed in the variation production. It is a figure which shows the production example at the time of the start of the customer waiting demo display, and the pseudo accurate light emission effect is performed. It is a time chart when a pseudo-correct effect is performed from the middle of executing the customer waiting demo display. It is a figure which shows the production example at the time of performing the pseudo-appropriate light emission effect from the middle of execution of the customer waiting demo display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the right-handed display when a game ball enters a first start opening in a high-accuracy time-short game state. It is a figure which shows the display example of the left-handed display when changing from the probability change game state to the normal game state. It is a figure which shows the display example when a game ball passes through a winning gate in a customer waiting state in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the display example when a game ball passes through a winning gate while the effect symbol changes in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the display example when the game ball passes through the winning gate during the menu screen display in the customer waiting state in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the display example when a game ball passes through a winning gate while the effect symbol of a normal game state fluctuates. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the display example when the game ball passes through the winning gate during the effect symbol change of a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows right-handed display control processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed display control processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the relationship between the passing of a game ball to a winning gate in 4th Embodiment, and the control which concerns on the left-handed display. It is a flowchart which shows right-handed display control processing in 5th Embodiment.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A through which the gaming ball flows down. It has a game board 2 and a game board 2.

The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island equipment of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via the hinge mechanism portion H on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum, the front portion of the game area 2A and the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 visually covers the front portion of the game area 2A with glass (transparent member) attached to the window portion provided in the center from the back surface side.

Further, on the other end side of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. The lock by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

The glass door Y2 is provided with a saucer 50 for storing a plurality of game balls and a launch operation device 3 capable of operating for launching the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a launch device 4 (see FIG. 3) capable of launching the game ball toward the game area 2A. The launching device 4 is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game ball stored in the saucer 50 is supplied to the launching device 4.

The firing operation device 3 is a handle lighting device 33 (handle) for causing the base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, the firing handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31, and the firing handle 32 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It has a light emitting part). The launching device 4 launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball launch strength”).

A plurality of handle lighting devices 33 (handle light emitting portions) are formed in a dome shape that constitutes a front side portion of the firing handle 32 and bulges forward, and is defined in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Light emitting elements (full-color LED, lamp, etc.) are arranged. When the LED lamp emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect (such as a correct light emission effect or a pseudo correct light emission effect, which will be described later) that causes the firing handle 32 to emit light in a predetermined mode. Further, at the front end of the handle lighting device 33, a blower port 34b is provided as a blowout port for the wind (air) sent out from the blower device 34 described later.

A blower device 34 for blowing wind (air) through the inside of the base 31 of the launch control device 3 and the blower port 34b is provided on the back surface side of the glass door Y2 and at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 3. ing. By operating the blower motor 34a provided in the blower device 34, a blower effect (such as a certain effect described later) that sends out wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the player's hand operating the firing handle 32 is executed. It is possible to do.

In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, a curved inner rail member 29B, an outer rail member 29C, and a game ball are arranged directly under the large winning opening 8 described later. A guide member 29D is provided with a guide path formed on the upper surface thereof so that the guide path can be guided toward the second starting port 7.

The decorative frame 29A is fitted in a substantially central portion of the game board 2. An image display device 14 made of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, a production accessory device 17 is provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

The inner rail member 29B is arranged outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is arranged outside the inner rail member 29B. The game ball launched with a predetermined game ball firing intensity rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 2A. The game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails or wind turbines.

The first to third general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, and 11-3 are provided in the left side region 2AL of the game region 2A. The fourth general winning opening 11-4 is provided in the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A. The first to fourth general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, and 11-4 have the first to fourth general winning openings detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11 respectively. -4a (see FIG. 3) is provided, and when the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a detect a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is provided. (Individual) game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

Further, a winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side region 2AR easily passes through the winning gate 10. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. On condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects the game ball, a normal symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player. The details of the ordinary symbol lottery will be described later.
Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the game ball flowing down the right side region 2AR easily passes through the winning gate 10, but it is difficult to flow down toward the first starting port 6. ..

At the lower part of the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, a first starting port 6 which is immutable and can always enter the ball is provided. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left side region 2AL can easily enter the first starting port 6. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a that detects a game ball. On the condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects the game ball, a first special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player. Details of the first special symbol lottery will be described later. Further, when the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

A variable second starting port 7 is provided directly below the first starting port 6. The second starting port 7 is controlled by the second starting port control device 70 in either a basic mode (closed mode) in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode (open mode) in which a prize can be won. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a that detects a game ball. On the condition that the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects the game ball, a second special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player. The details of the second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

The normally movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that a predetermined condition is satisfied), the movable piece 70A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 7 is closed. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes the basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normally movable piece 70A rotates forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end portion to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled in a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a special aspect of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normally movable piece 70A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

The predetermined condition for the second start port control device 70 is that it is determined to execute the auxiliary game in the ordinary symbol lottery by passing the game ball at the winning gate 10 described above. Therefore, the opening of the second starting port 7 by the rotation of the normally movable piece 70A is performed when the game ball flows down the right region 2AR where the game ball easily passes through the winning gate 10. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball flows down the right side region 2AR, so that the ball can easily enter the second starting port 7.

A variable large winning opening 8 is provided on the downstream side of the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side region 2AR can easily enter the large winning opening 8. The grand prize opening 8 is controlled by the grand prize opening control device 80 in either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The large winning opening 8 is provided with a large winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the large winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

The special winning opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a driving unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that a predetermined condition is satisfied), the special movable piece 80A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the large winning opening 8 is played. The ball is closed so that it cannot enter. The closing of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic aspect of the large winning opening 8.

On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end portion to open the large winning opening 8 so that the game ball can enter. The opening of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special aspect of the large winning opening 8. When the special winning opening 8 is opened, the special movable piece 80A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the large winning opening 8.

The predetermined condition for the large winning opening control device 80 is the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery". ”), It is decided to perform a special game (big hit game).

On the surface of the game board 2 below the game area 2A, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold. A hold display device including a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 7.

The first special symbol lottery is a jackpot judgment as to whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the special symbol judgment information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6, and the result of the jackpot judgment. Based on this, it means performing a special symbol determination for determining the type of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In addition, the second special symbol lottery is to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won based on the special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7, and the second special symbol display. It refers to determining the type of special symbol to be displayed on the device 21. That is, it can be said that each special symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player.

When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 performs variable display of the first special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the result of the first special symbol lottery is notified of the first special symbol. A stop display is performed. Further, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 21 performs variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery after a lapse of a predetermined time. The stop display of the symbol is performed.

For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 moves and blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the special symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery lights up.

The ordinary symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of an ordinary symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball passes through the winning gate 10. The ordinary symbol lottery is a hit determination of whether or not a winner has been won based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10, and the ordinary symbol display device based on the result of the hit determination. It means to perform a normal symbol determination for determining the type of a normal symbol to be displayed on 22. That is, it can be said that the ordinary symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player.

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 performs a variable display of the normal symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a stop display of the normal symbol for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed.

For example, each of the ordinary symbol display devices 22 is provided with a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the normal symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery lights up.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the starting ports 6 and 7 during the change display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game (special game) in which the big winning opening control device 80 operates, the change display of the special symbol is immediately displayed. The result of the special symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the variable display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a certain condition, an upper limit value is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended from the variable display. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to "4" for each of the starting ports 6 and 7. That is, up to four rights to execute the variable display of the special symbol can be reserved for each of the starting ports 6 and 7.

The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the number of holds (U1: hereinafter, referred to as "first special symbol hold number") of the change display of the first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "first special symbol change display"). do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the number of holds (U2: hereinafter, referred to as "second special symbol hold number") of the change display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol change display"). do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 are each provided with, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and a predetermined LED is turned on according to the number of holds.

Similarly, the upper limit of the number of reserved symbols is set to 4 for the variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "various display of ordinary figures"), and the number of reserved symbols (G: hereinafter referred to as "number of reserved figures"). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided with, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of normal symbol hold.

Further, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device is an image display device 14, an audio output device 15 (speaker), an effect lighting device 16 (effect light emitting unit), an effect accessory device 17, an effect button device 18, and a handle lighting device. It is composed of 33 (handle light emitting unit) and a blower device 34. The image display device 14 and the effect device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect button device 18, the handle lighting device 33, and the blower device 34 are provided on the glass door Y2. ing.

The image display device 14 displays various still images and moving images (movies) according to the progress of the game, thereby performing an effect display using images. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

The audio output device 15 (speaker) produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 includes a game board lighting device provided on the game board 2 and a glass door lighting device provided on the glass door Y2, and the irradiation direction of the light of each lamp / LED provided in each lighting device. By changing the emission color and lighting, the effect is produced by lighting. The effect device 17 includes a movable portion 17A and a solenoid and a motor for operating the movable portion 17A, and by operating the movable portion 17A, the effect is produced by the operation.

Further, the saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects described later.

The effect button device 18 projects the operable effect button 18A, the effect button detection switch 18a for detecting the operation on the effect button 18A, and the effect button 18A in the normal position (normal state) and above the normal position. It is provided with an effect button drive motor 18b for moving (changing) to a position (protruding state) (see FIGS. 2 and 3). In addition, a plurality of light emitting elements (full-color LED, lamp, etc.) for causing the effect button 18A to emit light in a predetermined mode are also provided.

The selection button device 19 includes an operable selection button 19A and a selection button detection switch 19a for detecting an operation on the selection button 19A (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Further, a light emitting element (full-color LED, lamp, etc.) for causing the selection button 19A to emit light in a predetermined mode is also provided.

The selection button 19A includes an up button 191A, a left button 192A, a down button 193A, and a right button 194A. The buttons 191A to 194A are provided so as to be pressable while protruding from the saucer 50.

The effect device executes various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As the effect, for example, there is a variable effect (special symbol lottery effect) performed by the image display device 14 based on the results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The variable effect (special figure lottery effect) is performed with a variable display of the effect symbol and a stop display of the effect symbol.

The variation display of the effect symbol is performed in response to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol fluctuates in a predetermined mode for a predetermined time. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed in response to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol are collectively referred to, it is referred to as "effect symbol display"). In the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

The effect symbols represent, for example, three rows of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (for example, numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The effect symbol) and three rows of special effect symbols TZ4 (effect symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in the end side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. In the variable display of the effect symbols, the effect symbols in each row move from top to bottom (variable display) as if the reels were rotating. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol is not limited to this, and may be a mode of moving from right to left or rotating on the spot. Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the stop display of the effect symbols, the stop display (main stop) is performed after the above-mentioned three rows of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. ) Then, in the end side region, the special effect symbols TZ4 in the above three rows are stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) in accordance with the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display unit 140) when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is notified by the stop display of the special effect symbol TZ4.

In addition, instead of notifying the result of the special symbol lottery by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the effective line, the special symbol lottery is performed by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the effective line and the arrangement of the special effect symbols TZ4. The result may be notified. Further, the special effect symbol TZ4 is not displayed on the image display device 14 (variation display and stop display), but is displayed (variation display and stop display) on a dedicated display unit (LED display, etc.). Alternatively, the special effect symbols TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 may be used.

In the effect device, in addition to the variable effect (special figure lottery effect), the special (big hit) game effect performed when the big hit game is executed, and the variable display or special (big hit) game of the special symbol are performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a customer waiting effect (demo display) performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) that is not performed are performed.

On the back surfaces of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, and a game An information output terminal plate 108 is provided.

(Internal configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, the internal configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

The power supply board 107 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine Y (main control board 101, effect control board 102, It is supplied to the payout control board 103, the lamp control board 104, the image control board 105, and various electronic components). In addition, the power supply voltage supplied from the outside is monitored, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it is detected that a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and a low-level power failure detection signal is sent to the main control board 101. Output.

Further, the power supply board 107 includes a backup power supply including a capacitor that is stored by supplying power from the outside, and can supply backup power to the main control board 101 even when the power supply is cut off (power failure). The backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control board 102 and the payout control board 103. Further, the backup power source is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The main control board 101 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators), etc., performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, or the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

On the input side of the main control board 101, a first start port detection sensor 6a, a second start port detection sensor 7a, a large winning opening detection sensor 8a, and a winning gate detection sensor 10a pass through an input port (not shown). , And the 1st to 4th general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a are connected. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101.

On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating a normally movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70 and a large winning opening control are provided via an output port (not shown). A large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B and the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the ordinary symbol display device 22, and the first special symbol are held via an output port (not shown). The display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling each display device to each display device 20 to 25.

Further, a game information output terminal plate 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information about a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal plate 108 as an external signal.

A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal plate 108. The game information output terminal plate 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the game machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the above-mentioned predetermined game information (external signal).

The effect control board 102 comprehensively controls the progress of the effect (effect operation). The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102 so as to be communicable. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the process related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

An effect button detection switch 18a and a selection button detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been operated to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 serves as a relay board that relays the effect button detection signal.

When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the operation of the selection button 19A has been performed to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 serves as a relay board that relays the selection button detection signal.

The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A to detect the operation of the upper button 191A, and is connected to the upper button detection switch 191a and the left button 192A to detect the operation of the left button 192A. The lower button detection switch 193a is connected to the lower button 193A to detect the operation of the lower button 193A, and the right button detection switch 194a is connected to the right button 194A to detect the operation of the right button 194A.

When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operation, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are transmitted via the lamp control board 104, respectively. Is output to the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a "selection button detection signal".

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button detection switch 18a and the selection button detection switch 19a detect the operation (operation) input from the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the player's hand. Even if it is provided with an infrared sensor (motion sensor) for detecting movements such as holding up, and a detection element capable of detecting inputs such as movements and operations of the player such as a touch panel for detecting a predetermined operation of the player. good.

The sub CPU 102a has a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, and an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the above, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read and arithmetic processing is performed, and based on the processing, a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball from the launching device 4 and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c, and is bidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be communicable.

A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout control board 103. The touch sensor 32a is mounted in the launch handle 32 of the launch operation device 3. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the launch control board 106. The firing volume knob 32b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 to detect the rotation angle.

Further, the firing solenoid 41 of the launching device 4 is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103 via the power supply board 107. When the payout control board 103 receives the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the payout control board 103 permits the firing solenoid 41 to be energized.

Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated and the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 changes, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the knob 32b of the firing volume is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this way, the payout control board 103 energizes and controls the firing solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the firing volume knob 32b to launch the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 106. Since one game ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

Further, on the output side of the payout control board 103, a payout device 5 for paying out the game balls supplied from a storage tank (not shown) provided on the upper back surface of the game board mounting frame Y1 to the tray 50 (player). The payout drive unit 51 is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b and performs arithmetic processing based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, and controls the payout device 5 to give the predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 103a.

The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above-mentioned boards. An effect lighting device 16, an effect accessory device 17, a handle lighting device 33, and a blower device 34 are connected to the output side of the lamp control board 104.

The lamp CPU 104a includes the effect lighting device 16, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17, and the effect button device based on a command related to the effect control (hereinafter, referred to as “effect control command”) transmitted from the effect control board 102. 18. Light emission control of light emitting elements (full-color LED, lamp, etc.) provided in the selection button device 19, the handle lighting device 33, and the like is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a includes a solenoid and a motor for operating the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command, and an effect button drive motor 18b for operating the effect button 18A of the effect button device 18. Further, the drive control of the blower motor 34a or the like for sending out the wind from the blower device 34 is performed.

Further, the lamp control board 104 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18a of the effect button device 18 and the selection button detection switch 19a of the selection button device 19, and is connected to the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the selection button device 19. The effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal are relayed to and from.

The image control board 105 has an image generation unit 105B that generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14, and an audio output device 15. It has a sound generation unit 105C that generates a sound signal related to the sound to be output to the sound output device 15 and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

The control unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes a control CPU 105Aa, a control ROM 105Ab, and a control RAM 105Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

The centralized CPU 105Aa is connected to the centralized ROM 105Ab in which the control program and the like are stored, and the control program necessary for the operation of the centralized CPU 105Aa is read out. When the general CPU 105Aa receives a command related to the effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the control CPU 105Aa gives an instruction of an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 to the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also gives the sound generation unit 105C an instruction of the image to be displayed on the image display device 14. An instruction of the voice to be output from the voice output device 15 is given.

The centralized RAM 105Ac functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the centralized CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores the data read from the centralized ROM 105Ab.

Further, the general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, and displays a control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for the purpose are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , Various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14 is included.

The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP105Ba (Video Display Processor) which is an image processor, a CGROM105Bb in which image data is stored, and a VRAM 105Bc having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. ing.

The VDP105Ba is connected to the CGROM105Bb in which the image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on the instruction from the control CPU 105Aa. The image data is a material representing an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, an individual image such as a landscape, a character, and a background image such as a dialogue that constitutes the effect symbol image or the background of the effect symbol. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM105Bb is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image.

Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 105Bb may be configured such that not all the image data is compressed but only a part of the image data is compressed. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to VDP105Ba. The VDP105Ba divides this pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

Next, the details of the various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 12.

(Big hit judgment table)
4 (a-1) and 4 (a-2) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot determination table for performing jackpot determination. The jackpot determination constitutes the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not a "big hit" for executing a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player has been won.

FIG. 4A-1 is a table (hereinafter referred to as “first jackpot determination table”) referred to in the first jackpot determination performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4A-2 is a table referred to in the second jackpot determination performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7 (hereinafter referred to as “second jackpot determination table”). be.

Each jackpot judgment table is a jackpot judgment table that is referred to when the jackpot winning probability, which will be described later, is relatively low (set to a standard value) (hereinafter referred to as "low probability jackpot judgment table"). It is composed of a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "high probability jackpot determination table") that is referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

In each jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by collating the jackpot determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 against the jackpot determination table, "big hit" or "loss" Is judged (determined).

If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", a jackpot game (special game) accompanied by opening the jackpot 8 is executed after the stop display of the special symbol (special result) indicating the result is executed, and the prize ball is higher than usual. Will be in a state where it is easy to acquire. That is, the game value is given to the player.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. 4B. In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of execution of the reach effect are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the reach effect is executed in the variable effect by collating the reach determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 against the reach determination table. It is determined (determined) whether or not to do so.

If the result of the reach determination is "with reach" to execute the reach effect, the reach effect is performed to raise the expectation of the player to win the jackpot in the variable effect (special figure lottery effect). In the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to have "reach" in the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 is the first described later. Although it is not divided by the number of special figure reservations, the probability of being determined to have "reach" is divided by the number of first special figure reservations and may be different depending on the number of first special figure reservations. For example, the probability that the reach determination table used when the first special figure reservation number is the first value (for example, the first special figure reservation number = 0 to 1) is determined as "with reach" is the first special figure. The probability of being judged as "with reach" in the reach judgment table used when the figure hold number is a second value larger than the first value (for example, the first special figure hold number ≥ 2) should be higher than the probability of being judged as "with reach". Can be done.

Similarly, the probability of being determined to have "reach" in the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 7 is held in the second special figure described later. Although it is not divided by the number, the probability of being determined to have "reach" is divided by the number of the second special figure reserved, and may be different depending on the number of the second special figure reserved. For example, the probability that "with reach" is determined in the reach determination table used when the number of reserved second special figures is the third value (for example, the number of reserved second special figures = 0 to 1) is the second special figure. The probability of being judged as "with reach" in the reach judgment table used when the figure hold number is larger than the third value and is a fourth value (for example, the second special figure hold number ≥ 2) should be higher than the probability of being judged as "with reach". Can be done.

As the reach effect, for example, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect) is used in two areas of the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. When the symbol TZ3) is temporarily stopped and the predetermined effect symbol is stopped on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, the normal state is that the effect symbols representing the winning of the jackpot are arranged (so-called "reach state"). Reach production can be mentioned. In addition to this, there is a full-rotation reach effect in which the same type of effect symbols are arranged and displayed in a variable manner in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

After a reach state occurs in the reach production, raise the expectation of winning a big hit (expect that the variable display of the special symbol will be a special result) Specific production ("SP reach production" or "SPSP reach production" described later) May or may not be done evolvingly. In addition, the reach state does not always occur in the reach production. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a specific effect is performed that raises the expectation of the player to win the big hit without the reach state occurring. In the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the reach effect is performed. However, even in the case of a big hit, it is possible to perform the reach determination and perform the reach effect only when the reach determination determines that there is "reach".

(Special symbol judgment table)
5 (a) to 5 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a special symbol determination table for performing special symbol determination. The special symbol determination constitutes the above-mentioned special symbol lottery, and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (stop display mode of the special symbol) based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is to be.

The special symbol determination table is roughly divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit or loss). That is, FIG. 5 (a) shows a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning, which is referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", and FIG. 5 (b) shows that the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit". It is a special symbol determination table for loss referred to in the special symbol determination in the case of "loss".

Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start port (first start port 6 or second start port 7) at which the game ball that triggers the special symbol determination is entered. When the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol determination table is further divided according to whether or not the reach effect is executed (reach determination result).

In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the type of special symbol (determination result) to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. The type of symbol is determined (determined). As information indicating the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the special symbol stop symbol data and the effect symbol designation command are set.

The special symbol stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing on the effect control board 102. The effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is used in the processing on the effect control board 102.

The effect symbol designation command is 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) in which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It is composed of 1-byte DATA data for identifying the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Regarding the effect symbol designation command, if the MODE data is "E3H", it means that the first special symbol display device 20 will stop and display the special symbol, and if the MODE data is "E4H", the second special Indicates that the symbol display device 21 performs stop display of a special symbol. The effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E3H" is referred to as "first effect symbol designation command", and the effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E4H" is referred to as "second effect symbol designation command".

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the jackpot 8 and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. The designated command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and the ending. An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

(Large winning opening opening / closing control table)
6 (b) to 6 (c) are diagrams showing an example of a big winning opening opening / closing control table used when controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game. FIG. 6B is a large winning opening opening / closing control table for long-hit games referred to in the long-hit games constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6C is a short-hit game referred to in the short-hit games constituting the jackpot games. It is a large winning opening opening / closing control table.

The jackpot opening / closing control table for the jackpot game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot 8 in the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8, the round number (R), which is the number of the round game, and the special electric power, which is the opening number of the large winning opening 8 (operation of the large winning opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time / closing time (operating time / non-operating time) of the large winning opening 8 are set.

(Game condition data judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a game condition data determination table for determining (determining) game condition data newly set after the jackpot game is completed. The game condition data judgment table is divided according to the state of the jackpot winning probability (low probability game state / high probability game state), and in each of the divided tables, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) and the game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored. The game condition data includes the status of the jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning, the status of the starting opening winning ease, and the number of special symbol displays that can be executed depending on the status of the game condition (Xa, Ja: hereinafter, hereinafter, It represents "the number of executions"), and three types of "00H" to "02H" are set.

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a game condition determination table for determining a game condition from game condition data. The game condition determination table shows the game condition data, ON / OFF of flags (high probability flag and time saving flag) indicating the state of each game condition, and the number of times (Xa) of variable display of special symbols that can be executed depending on the state of the game condition. , Ja: Hereinafter referred to as "executable number of times") is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times the variable display of the special symbol can be executed can be said to be the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
8 to 9 are diagrams showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a mode of variation display of a special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure variation pattern”). The special symbol fluctuation pattern is associated with the time required to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol fluctuation time") and the effect type of the variation effect (special figure lottery effect) according to the variation display of the special symbol. ing. The details of the variation effect will be described later, but it is an effect in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed until the end when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the variation display of the above-mentioned effect symbol is included in the effect. In addition to variable display of symbols, an image effect such as an object image such as a character by the image display device 14 or a predetermined movie image, a sound effect by the sound output device 15, a lighting effect by the effect lighting device 16, an operation effect by the movable part 17A, etc. Consists of.

The special symbol variation patterns are the first special symbol variation pattern, which is a mode of variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, and the second special symbol variation pattern displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. 2 It is distinguished from the second special symbol variation pattern, which is an aspect of the variation display of the special symbol.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a special figure fluctuation pattern in a non-time saving game state described later, and FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a time saving gaming state (low probability time saving) described later. , High accuracy time saving), is a diagram showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a special figure fluctuation pattern. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is roughly divided according to the gaming state.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data and the number of special symbol reservations (the number of special symbol stop symbols that can specify the type of special symbol to be variablely displayed (the type of start port related to the variable display) and the result of special symbol determination. It is divided by U1 or U2).

In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special figure variation pattern determination table. Figure Fluctuation pattern is determined.

Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is assigned with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has an expectation of a jackpot winning or a specific jackpot winning (for example, probability variation jackpot, long hit, etc.). Expectations are associated with each other.

Further, the special symbol variation pattern is formally determined by the special symbol variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (at the time of the special symbol memory determination process in step S310). It is tentatively determined by the first pre-determination process (step S237) or the second pre-determination process (step S247) at the time of entering the balls 6 and 7 (during the input control process in step S200).

In addition, a start opening winning designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, which will be described later, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure variation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the special figure variation pattern determination.

The special symbol variation pattern designation command is a 1-byte unit for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) on which variation display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is performed. It is composed of the MODE data of the above and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. Regarding the special symbol variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it means that the first special symbol display device 20 performs the variation display of the special symbol, and if the MODE data is "E7H", the first is 2 Indicates that the special symbol display device 21 performs variable display of the special symbol.

The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is "E6H" is the "first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command", and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is "E7H" is the "second special figure". It is called "variation pattern specification command".

The start port winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of start port and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Regarding the start port winning designation command, if the MODE data is "E1H", it means that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is "E2H", it means that the second start port 7 has been entered. Indicates that a game ball has entered. The start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is the "first start opening prize designation command", and the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E2H" is the "second start opening prize designation command". ".

Further, in the rightmost column of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, as a reference, the production type (rough classification) of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is described.

Here, the effect type of the variation effect related to the special figure variation pattern described in the effect type column of FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described.

The "normal variation" shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a normal variation effect without reach, and it is difficult for the player to have the expectation of winning a big hit. The "shortening fluctuation" is a fluctuation production in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation and does not involve reach, and it is difficult for the player to have the expectation of winning a big hit. The "ultra-shortening fluctuation" is a fluctuation production in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the shortened fluctuation and does not involve reach, and it is difficult for the player to have the expectation of winning a big hit.

"Reach" means that a part of the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that notifies the jackpot is temporarily stopped, and the other effect symbols and the special effect symbol TZ4 fluctuate, giving the player a feeling of expectation of the jackpot. It means a variation mode to have. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying a jackpot, two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at "7" (pseudo stop). ), The remaining effect symbol TZ2 and special effect symbol TZ4 are fluctuating.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 sway slightly or the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped. This mode is sometimes called a pseudo stop. Further, regarding the special effect symbol TZ4, the variation display is started in synchronization with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the stop display is synchronized with the stop display of the special symbol. Therefore, the effect symbol TZ1 Although the temporary stop is not performed as in the case of ~ TZ3, the variable display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the display synchronized (synchronized) with the variable stop (including the temporary stop) may be performed.

The “normal reach” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 means that two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the left side region and the right side region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the remaining one effect symbol TZ2 is in the central region. Is fluctuating, and the special effect symbol TZ4 fluctuates in the end side region. This is a reach effect with a low expectation of winning a jackpot (a special game is executed).

In the present embodiment, although "normal reach" is not selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot winning, "normal reach" is selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot winning. You can also do it.

The “SP reach” shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a super reach effect having a higher expectation of winning a big hit (execution of a special game) than a normal reach. For example, the effect symbol TZ2 in the central region that has not been temporarily stopped may change in a special manner, or a special effect image, movie, or the like may be displayed.

The "SPSP reach" shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a special reach effect having a higher expectation of winning a big hit (execution of a special game) than the super reach. For example, it may be executed after Super Reach, or a special production image or movie different from Super Reach may be displayed.

Although it is not described in the column of the effect type in FIGS. 8 and 9, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in any of the variable effects. The "pseudo-continuous effect" is to execute once or a plurality of special effects in which the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one special symbol lottery. It means a notice effect according to the variation mode (simulating the variation display multiple times). As for the special effect symbol TZ4, the special effect is not performed even during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, and the variation display is continued until the variation of the special effect stops.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table in the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 8 is that the larger the number of reserved special figures, the higher the ratio of selection / determination of shortened variation.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 9 is that the larger the number of reserved special figures, the higher the ratio of selection / determination of ultra-shortening variation.
The second feature is that an ultra-shortening fluctuation (2 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time than the shortening fluctuation (4 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
The third feature is that a normal fluctuation (6 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation (8 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
The fourth feature is that a long fluctuation (10 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation (13.5 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.

10 (a) to 10 (f) show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning a prize at the winning gate 10.

(Collision detection table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table for performing a hit determination. The hit determination is to determine (determine) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player with the opening of the second starting port 7.

The collision detection table is divided according to the ease of winning the starting opening. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table that is referred to in the non-time saving game state and a hit determination table that is referred to in the time reduction game state.

In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, either "hit" or "loss" is determined by collating the hit determination random number acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the hit determination table. If the "hit" is won, after the stop display of the normal symbol (specific result) indicating the result, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the second starting port 7 is executed, and the game ball enters the second starting port 7 more than usual. It is easy to ball and it is easy to win a prize ball. That is, the game value is given to the player.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table for performing normal symbol determination. The normal symbol determination is to determine (determine) the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The ordinary symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

In each normal symbol determination table, the normal symbol determination value and the stop-displayed ordinary symbol are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by collating the random number for normal symbol determination acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 against the normal symbol determination table. As information indicating the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, and is used in the processing on the effect control board 102.

(Public map fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 10C determines a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “normal symbol fluctuation pattern”) associated with a time required for displaying a fluctuation of a normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “normal symbol fluctuation time”). It is a figure which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The normal map fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a normal map variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-time saving game state and a normal map variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the time saving game state.

In each table, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more normal map fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the type of the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table. ..

(Auxiliary game reference data judgment table)
FIG. 10D is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary game reference data determination table used when controlling an auxiliary game. Data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game is stored in this table. As shown in FIG. 10D, the auxiliary game reference data determination table is associated with the combination of the current start opening winning ease and the normal figure stop symbol data, and the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the starting port winning ease state when the normal symbol determination is performed and the result of the normal symbol determination.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 10E is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling an auxiliary game. Conditions for controlling the auxiliary game are stored in this table. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 7, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

(2nd start port open / close control table)
FIG. 10 (f) is a diagram showing an example of a second start port open / close control table for auxiliary games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start port 7. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second starting port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, the normal electric operation number (D), which is the opening number of the second starting port 7 (operation of the second starting port control device 70) in the auxiliary game, and the second 2 The opening time / closing time (operating time / non-operating time) of the starting port 7 is set.

(Explanation of types of special games)
In the present embodiment, the "big hit game" is executed when the "big hit" is won as a special game advantageous to the player with the opening of the big winning opening 8 (operation of the big winning opening control device 80). Is provided. The big hit game is mainly divided into a "long hit game" and a "short hit game" according to the difference in the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8. Therefore, during the "big hit game", it is advantageous for the player to let the game ball flow down toward the big winning opening 8 in the right side area 2AR.

In the jackpot game, a round game involving opening of the jackpot 8 at least once is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times the large winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total of the times that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are preset. The reason why it is "can be opened" is that the number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the large winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times, the large winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Further, even if the maximum opening time has not passed, the big winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. The maximum number of times the big winning opening 8 is opened and the maximum opening time in each round game may or may not be unified in each big hit game.

(Explanation of game conditions)
Next, the game conditions that are the conditions for the progress of the game will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as game conditions. Regarding the winning probability of the jackpot, the game progresses under the low probability game state or the high probability game state, and regarding the ease of winning the starting opening of the game ball, the game progresses under the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. do. The initial (when the power is turned on) gaming condition is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state as a reference. Further, the low-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are referred to as the low-probability short-time gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are referred to as the high-probability short-time gaming state (probability variation gaming state).
Here, in the "normal game state", in order to execute the first special symbol lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 6, the left region 2AL where it is easy to enter the first start opening 6 is directed. It is an advantageous condition for the player to let the game ball flow down.

In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state regarding the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to 1 / 299.3, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the high-probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state, that is, it is set to 1/40, which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the low-probability gaming state, and the number of jackpot winnings per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous for the player. It can be said that it is in a state of being.

The non-time-saving game state is a state in which the ease of winning a prize at the starting opening is normal. Specifically, in the non-time saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time of the second start port control device 70 (second start) that operates when a "hit" is won in the hit determination. It means that the total of the opening time of the mouth 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning a hit in the hit determination for a normal symbol is set to 1/50. The reason why the "total opening time" is set is that the second starting port 7 may be opened a plurality of times for each hit. Since the number of game balls that can be won is limited for each hit, when the number of game balls wins, the game is closed without waiting for the opening time or the number of times of opening.

On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state (low accuracy / high accuracy), the opening time of the second starting port 7 (operating time of the second starting port control device 70) per unit time is larger than that in the non-time-saving gaming state. It refers to a gaming state in which the second starting port 7 is likely to be in the open mode for a long time. Due to the relatively high ease of winning the starting opening and the relatively short fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the rate at which a shorter fluctuation time is selected than in the non-time-saving gaming state is selected. The number (the average value of the fluctuation time is short) increases, and the number of times the second special symbol determination can be executed per unit time also increases. Therefore, under the same jackpot winning probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the larger the number of jackpot winnings per unit time, and thus the time-saving gaming state ( Low probability / high probability) can be said to be a state advantageous to the player as compared with the non-time saving game state.
That is, in the time-saving game state (low accuracy / high accuracy), it is possible to make the game ball flow down toward the second starting port 7 located ahead of the winning gate 10 in the right side area 2AR and the right side area 2AR. It will be a favorable condition for the person.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total maximum opening time of the second starting port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, which is a hit. The probability of winning is set to 49/50. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set more favorably for the player than in the non-time saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the second starting port 7 is opened twice via a closing (interval) for 1.5 seconds, but there is no such closing and it may be opened only once. Further, the closure may be set a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the starting ports 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player launches the game balls by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the time-saving game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 7 as compared with the non-time-saving game state, so that the decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player can be suppressed. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the time-saving game state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving game state.

In this way, depending on the winning of the jackpot, the type of jackpot game (long hit game / short hit game) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state / high probability game state and non-time short game state / Combination with the time-saving game state) is determined. In view of this, the actual types of jackpots (types of jackpots based on the profit level enjoyed by the player) are the types of jackpot games to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game is completed ( It can be said that it is a combination with the game state). Therefore, in the following, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, the combination of the type of jackpot game guided by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, the type of profit enjoyed by the player is used. It is possible to classify the types of jackpots.

By winning the jackpot, the long-hit game is executed, and then the jackpot is set to 50 high-probability game states and 100 short-time game states. The jackpot that causes the long hit game to be executed and then set to the high probability game state of 50 times and the time saving game state of 80 times is "high probability middle time saving long hit (probability variation jackpot 2)", and the short hit game is executed by winning. After that, the jackpot that is set to the high probability gaming state of 50 times and the time saving gaming state of 60 times is referred to as "high probability short time saving short hit (probability variation jackpot 3)".

If the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the game is in a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state.

(Control processing of the main control board)
Next, the control process executed by the main CPU 101a on the main control board 101 will be described.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the startup program from the main ROM 101b in response to the power being turned on, determines whether or not the RAM clear switch (not shown) provided on the main control board 101 is ON, and clears the RAM. When the switch is ON, the process of initializing each storage area of the main RAM 101c is performed, and when the RAM clear switch is not ON, the control state before the power failure (power failure) is restored (returned). Perform the process of causing.

In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure variation random number for determining the special figure variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. ..

In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates the initial value random number composed of the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the like. After that, the processing of step S20 and step S30 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds), so that the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a into the stack area.

In step S110, the main CPU 101a is a special game timer counter that performs update processing of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, update processing of the stop time of the special symbol, update processing of the opening time, update processing of the opening / closing time of the grand prize opening 8, and the like. Further, a time control process for updating the auxiliary game timer counter, which performs update processing of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, update processing of the stop time of the normal symbol, update processing of the opening / closing time of the second start port 7, and the like, is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a big hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a hit determination random number, and a normal symbol determination random number.

In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the hit determination initial value random number.

Regarding the update of various random numbers, the random numbers are updated by adding "1" to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for each type of random number. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without adding "1", and the random number indicated by the random number counter has already been set once. When the lap initial value is reached, the initial value random number at that time is set as a new lap initial value, and each random number value is newly updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a newly valid signal has been transmitted from the predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.

In step S300, the main CPU 101a includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a first special symbol hold display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a large winning opening control device 80. (Special symbol system device control) to perform special symbol special electric control processing (special symbol related processing). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26.

In step S400, the main CPU 101a controls the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second start port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Design processing) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 to 31.

In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a has a starting port (first starting port 6, second starting port 7), a large winning opening 8, and first to fourth general winning ports 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, Checks whether the prize ball counter corresponding to 11-4 exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is sent. It is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

In step S600, the main CPU 101a includes external signal output control data for outputting information about the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid. Drive control data for driving the 80B (starting port opening / closing solenoid drive data and winning opening opening / closing solenoid drive data), and predetermined symbols are displayed on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25. Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data) for display is performed.

In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs an output control process. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to light the LEDs of the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. .. Finally, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a has input a detection signal from any of the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11-4a, that is, a game ball. Determines whether or not the ball has entered any of the first to fourth general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, and 11-4. When the main CPU 101a does not input the detection signal from the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a, the process shifts to step S220. When the main CPU 101a inputs a detection signal from any of the first to fourth general prize opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11-4a, the main CPU 101a is used for the prize ball. The predetermined data is added to the prize ball counter and updated.

In step S210, the main CPU 101a detects the first general winning opening entry ball designation command from the second general winning opening detection sensor 11-2a when the detection signal is input from the first general winning opening detection sensor 11-1a. When a signal is input, the second general winning opening entry designation command is issued, and when a detection signal is input from the third general winning opening detection sensor 11-3a, the third general winning opening entry designation command is issued. When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11-4a, a process of setting the fourth general winning opening entry ball designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c is performed.

In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 8. If the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the process shifts to step S230. When the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball, and wins the large winning opening 8 at the same time. The counter value of the large winning opening regulation winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection sensor 6a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 6 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 7 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10 (starting region). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(First start port detection signal input processing of the main control board)
Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if there is a valid detection signal, "1" is added to the start port prize ball counter for paying out the prize ball in step S232. The first start opening winning flag is turned on in the storage area of the first starting opening winning flag of the main RAM 101c.

In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the step In S234, the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter is added by "1" and updated.

In step S234, the main CPU 101a determines the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c in order to update the first special symbol hold display number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23. Set in the area. Further, in step S235, the main CPU 101a sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the first special figure reservation number (U1) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S236, the main CPU 101a includes a jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, a special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, a reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern. The random number for determining the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the random number counter for determination is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Hereinafter, the jackpot judgment random number, the special symbol judgment random number, the reach judgment random number, and the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random number are collectively referred to as "special figure judgment information".

The first special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special symbol determination information is numbered in the storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the smallest storage part of. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

In step S237, the main CPU 101a performs the first pre-determination process based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6. Here, the first pre-determination process will be described.

Specifically, in the first pre-determination process, the stop symbol data of the first special symbol and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S236. That is, the main CPU 101a performs the first pre-determination process of the first special symbol before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312), and the special symbol variation pattern determination process (step S313), which will be described later. The stop symbol data and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern are determined.

Then, in step S238, the main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the first special symbol determined in the first pre-determination process and the first start port winning designation command corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern for the production of the main RAM 101c. It is set in the data storage area (transmission buffer), and the first start port detection signal input process is completed.

(Second start port detection signal input processing of the main control board)
Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, it ends the second start port detection signal input process, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, it shifts the process to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the start opening prize ball counter for paying out the prize balls and updates it, adds "1" to the second start opening winning rule counter, and updates the main. The second start opening winning process for turning on the second starting opening winning flag in the storage area of the second starting opening winning flag of the RAM 101c is performed. The second start opening winning rule counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for one auxiliary game is limited.

In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter that counts the second special symbol hold number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the second start port detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is smaller than 4, the step The process is transferred to S244.

In step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value (U2) of the second special figure hold number counter by adding "1". Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a displays the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c in order to update the second special symbol hold display number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24. Set in the specified area of. Further, in step S245, the main CPU 101a sets the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the second special figure reservation number (U2) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S246, the main CPU 101a includes a jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, a special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, a reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern. The random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the random number counter for determination (special figure determination information) is acquired and stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area.

The second special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special symbol determination information is numbered in the storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the smallest storage part of. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

Then, the main CPU 101a performs the second pre-determination process based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 7 in step S247. Here, the second pre-determination process will be described.

Specifically, in the second pre-determination process, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S246. That is, the main CPU 101a stops the second special symbol as the second pre-determination process before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312), and the special symbol variation pattern determination process (step S313). Determine the data and the second special figure fluctuation pattern.

Then, in step S248, the main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the second special symbol determined in the second pre-determination process and the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern for the production of the main RAM 101c. It is set in the data storage area (transmission buffer), and the second start port detection signal input process is completed.

(Winning gate detection signal input processing of the main control board)
Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, the winning gate detection sensor 10a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main winning gate detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S252.

In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol hold number counter for counting the normal symbol hold number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main winning gate detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S253.

In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value (G) of the normal figure hold number counter by adding "1". Further, in step S253, the main CPU 101a shifts the normal symbol hold display data indicating the hold number to a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold display number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. set. Further, in step S254, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (G) in the production transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the number of reserved figures (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S255, the main CPU 101a includes a hit determination random number indicated by the hit determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number indicated by the ordinary symbol determination random number counter, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination random number indicated by the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination random number counter. Is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, and the process is transferred to step S256. In step S256, the main CPU 101a sets the winning gate passage designation command corresponding to the passing (winning) of the game ball to the winning gate 10 in the production transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c, and detects the main winning gate. The signal input process ends. Hereinafter, the hit determination random number, the normal symbol determination random number, and the general figure fluctuation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as "general map determination information".

The normal symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11 (c)), and the normal symbol determination information is stored in a storage unit having a small number among the storage units in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the part. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. The value of the special figure special electric processing data is loaded in step S301, the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination process (step S310). ), If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the processing is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is performed to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the big hit game end processing (step S350). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 26.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step 310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move the process.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a subtracts and updates the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter by "1", and in step S310-6, corresponds to the subtracted second special symbol reservation number (U2). The special symbol storage designation command to be used is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area. Shift processing is performed to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is deleted. As a result, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S310-5.

The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol hold number counter by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and corresponds to the subtracted first special symbol hold number (U1) in step S310-6. The special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. Shift processing is performed to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol relevant storage area (0th storage unit) and stored in the 0th storage unit. The figure determination information is deleted. As a result, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the storage areas corresponding to each.

In addition, in order to update the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2) with the shift processing of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, specifically, the data. In order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port according to the above, the first and second special symbol hold display data are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the number of special symbol hold (U1 or U2).

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special symbol reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special symbol reservation storage area and shifted (the number of second special symbol reservations is set to the first special symbol reservation). Although it was decided to prioritize digestion over the number, the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting port (first special symbol reservation number). And the 2nd special symbol reservation number is digested in the order of winning), or the 1st special symbol reservation storage area is prioritized over the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area and shifted (the 1st special symbol reservation number is the 2nd). It may be digested with priority over the number of special figures on hold).

If it is determined in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to steps S319-1 to S319-3 to set the customer waiting state. Performs wait state setting processing. The customer waiting state means a state in which the special symbol variation display and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement includes that the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game are not executed. You may.

As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines in step S319-1 whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. When the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and determines the customer waiting state in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. If the flag “01H” is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area so that the customer waiting state is not repeatedly set in duplicate.

In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process. As a result, the effect control board 102 is notified that it is in the customer waiting state.
Here, as described in step S310-1, step S310-2, and step S310-4, the set of the customer waiting state designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect is displayed with the variation of the special symbol. If there is no hold number of the first special figure hold number (U1) and the second special figure hold number (U2), the command is executed by the main CPU 101a.

In step S311 the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot determination process based on the data shifted and newly stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol this time is the variation display of the first special symbol based on the subtraction of the number of reserved first special symbols (U1).

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that the display is a variation of the first special symbol, the main CPU 101a selects the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is not the first start port 6 (it is the second start port 7), the main CPU 101a selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-3.

Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is in a high-probability gaming state with respect to the current jackpot winning probability.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, further "from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3" Select the "first high-probability jackpot determination table" or the "second high-probability jackpot determination table".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the "first low probability" is further increased from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. Select "Big hit judgment table for low probability" or "Second big hit judgment table for low probability".

In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit in step S310-6, and selects the "high probability jackpot" selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. By collating with the "judgment table" or the "low-probability jackpot determination table", it is determined whether the jackpot is "big hit" or "missing", and the main jackpot determination process is terminated.

When the jackpot determination process is completed, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit winning". Here, if it is determined as "big hit winning", the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for big hit winning in step S312-4, and if it is not determined as "big hit winning", the step The process is transferred to S312-2.

The main CPU 101a makes a reach determination in step S312-2. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is collated with the reach determination table.

In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is determined as "with reach" as a result of the reach determination in step S312-2. If it is determined that there is "reach", the process is shifted to step S312-5, and a special symbol determination table for loss with reach is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no "reach", that is, "no reach", the process is shifted to step S312-6, and a special symbol determination table for loss without reach is selected.

In step S312-7, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the special symbol storage determination process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7). ), In step S312-8, either the special symbol determination table for the first start port or the special symbol determination table for the second start port is selected based on the type of the start port.

In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol determination that is shifted in step S310-8 and collates the special symbol determination random value in the 0th storage unit with the selected special symbol determination table.

Then, in step S312-10, the effect symbol designation command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S321-9, and the determined effect symbol designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Next, in step S312-11, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special symbol stop symbol data”) based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, that is, the special symbol. Is determined, and the determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

The determined special symbol stop symbol data determines a "big hit special symbol" or the like in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 24 when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of FIG. 22 as will be described later. At the same time, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG.

In step S312-12, the main CPU 101a collates the special symbol stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the game condition data is determined by collating the special figure stop symbol data with the selected game condition data determination table, and the game condition data is set in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination, the special figure variation pattern including information on the special figure variation time and the effect type of the variation effect described later is generated. decide.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 22. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON / OFF of the high-probability flag and the ON / OFF of the time-saving flag, which will be described later, in the current gaming state (high-probability gaming state / low-probability gaming state, and , Time-saving game state / non-time-saving game state), and select the special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines the special figure variation pattern determination table based on the special figure stop symbol data. This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the gaming state is further divided by the special figure stop symbol data.

If the special symbol stop symbol data is "19" or "29", that is, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the number of special symbol reservations (U1 or) related to the determination of the special symbol fluctuation pattern is further increased. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined based on U2). This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table relating to the loss without reach is also divided according to the number of special figure reservations.

If the special figure variation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a determines the special figure variation pattern in step S313-3. Specifically, the random number for determining the special figure variation pattern is collated with the determined special figure variation pattern determination table, and the special figure variation pattern is determined.

When the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern, the process returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19, and in step S310-9, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted for the production of the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.

As a result, the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 receives the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, and the special symbol variation pattern designation command to display the variation of the special symbol. Recognizes that is started, and determines the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect based on the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the special figure variation pattern specification command. The effect control board 102 may recognize that the variation display of the special symbol is started by receiving the effect symbol designation command and / or the special symbol variation pattern designation command. Further, the game state designation command may be transmitted after the effect symbol designation command or the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted.

Then, in step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure fluctuation time (see FIGS. 8 and 9) associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets the special symbol variation display data in order to display the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the mode of the variation display, and the variation time.

In step S310-12, the main CPU 101a sets the flag "00H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area to end the customer waiting state, and in step S310-. In 13, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set, and the present special symbol storage determination process is terminated.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 23. First, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol ends in step S320-1, in other words, whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310-10 has elapsed (special game timer). Counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not completed, the special symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol ends, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a issues a special symbol variation stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol ends. Set in the transmission data storage area.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a stops and displays the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, based on the special symbol stop symbol data set in step S312-11. To set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special symbol stop time”, for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

Then, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electric processing data in step S320-5, turns off the first start opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag in step S320-6, and performs this special symbol variation processing. To finish.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24. First, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends in step S330-1, in other words, the special symbol stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 elapses. Determine if it has been done. As a result, if it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is not completed, the stop display of the special symbol is terminated, and if it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is completed, the process is moved to step S330-2.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (set) in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area means that the time saving game state is currently in effect. When the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area, the process is moved to step S330-3, and when the time saving flag is turned off in the time saving flag storage area, the processing is moved to step S330-7.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a is set to "1" from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the time-saving game state, which indicates the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol due to the time-saving game state (J: hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times in the time-saving game state"). The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "" is stored as the remaining number of times (J) in the time-saving game state.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time saving number designation command corresponding to the time saving game state remaining number (J) in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the time saving remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining time saving number of times information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving game states (J) = 0. If the time-saving game state remaining number of times (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-6, and if the time-saving game state remaining number of times (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-7.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a turns off (clears) the time saving flag stored in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the remaining number of times (J) in the time-saving game state becomes "0" means that the variation display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Ja) that the special symbol can be changed in the time-saving game state, and the variation display of the special symbol due to the "time reduction" state is performed. Means that is finished.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is ON (set) in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the high-probability flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the player is currently in the high-probability gaming state. If the high-probability flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area, the process is moved to step S330-8, and if the flag is turned off in the high-probability flag storage area, the process is moved to step S330-12. Transfer.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a is a counter value of a high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of variation display of the special symbol due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “high-probability gaming state remaining number”). The calculated value (X-1) obtained by subtracting "1" from is stored as a new high-probability gaming state remaining number of times (X).

In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a sets the high-probability number of times designation command corresponding to the high-probability game state remaining number of times (X) set in the high-probability game state remaining number of times counter in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the high-probability remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the high-probability remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number of times information) is performed on the image display device 14.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-11, and if the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-12.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a turns off the high-probability flag stored in the high-probability flag storage area. The fact that the remaining number of times (X) in the high-probability gaming state becomes "0" means that the variation display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Xa) that the variation display of the special symbol can be executed in the high-probability gaming state, and the special symbol in the "high probability" state is performed. It means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the current gaming state is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is "big hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10-12, 20-21). do. Here, if it is not determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-14, and if it is determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-15.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, and performs a process for shifting the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data, and in step S330-16, the game condition flag storage area (time saving flag storage area and high probability flag storage area) and the high probability game state. Reset (clear) the remaining fluctuation count counter and the remaining fluctuation count counter in the time-saving game state. That is, it is controlled to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the production transmission data storage area as the jackpot game opening process. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time according to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. First, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-1 whether or not the opening is currently in progress. The opening here means the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (the first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-3. ..

In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, it is confirmed which big hit is according to the special figure stop symbol data, the big winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of big hit is selected, and the big winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing control table for long hit games or the large winning opening opening / closing control table for short hit games is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c according to the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the value stored in the round game number storage area (round number (R)) and stores it. At the time of step S340-3, the round game is even once. Since it has not been executed, the main CPU 101a stores "1" in the round game number storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (“1” is added to the special electric operation number (K) and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a energizes the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B. In order to open the large winning opening 8, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Here, the main CPU 101a sets the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. With reference to the round number (R) and the special electric operation number (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 8 (operating time of the large winning opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The game timer counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command indicating the current number of round games specified by the storage value of the round game count storage area is issued. Set in the transmission data storage area for production. This is to transmit the information that the round game is started to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first opening of the first round game of the long hit game, "1" is set in the round game number storage area and "1" is set in the special electric operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating a one-round game is set in the transmission data storage area for production. On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the special electric operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the transmission data storage area for production. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits the round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, the image display device 14 displays the effect such as "ROUND1".

In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means the period from the end of all the preset round games (the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is finished) to the end of the main jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently in progress, the process is moved to step S340-17, and it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is determined. Move the process to.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the large winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the large winning opening control device 80 is operating. When the main CPU 101a determines that the large winning opening 8 is being opened, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-8 whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 8 is satisfied. do. As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the large winning opening specified winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). It became) is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the main jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, in order to close the large winning opening 8, the energization stop data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c, and the large winning opening opening / closing determined in step 340-3 is performed. With reference to the control table, the closing time of the large winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and special electric operation number (K). As a result, the grand prize opening 8 will be closed.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has been completed. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the large winning opening specified winning counter is the specified number ( For example, since the process ends on the condition that the number of the counters reaches 9), it is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process is moved to step S340-12, and when it is determined that one round has not been completed, the main jackpot game process is ended.

If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the large winning opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether or not the preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the main jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-4.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electric operation number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the large winning opening regulation winning counter is cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot game is completed, that is, whether or not the value stored in the round game number storage area (round number (R) is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game). When the main CPU 101a determines "Yes", the process is transferred to step S340-15, and when the main CPU 101a determines "No", the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a updates and stores the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area by adding "1".

In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs the jackpot game end process. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game count storage area is reset.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, the type of jackpot is confirmed according to the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the ending time according to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it determines that the ending time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S340-18, and the ending time elapses. If it is determined that the game is not performed, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a loads the game condition data.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high-probability flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S350-5, and if it is determined that the high-probability flag is turned on, the high-probability flag is stored in the high-probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-3. Along with turning on "01H", a high-probability game state setting process is performed in which the number of times the game can be executed (Xa) is set in the high-probability game state remaining number counter.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a sets the high-probability number of times designation command corresponding to the high-probability game state remaining number of times (X) set in the high-probability game state remaining number of times counter in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the high-probability remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and a process for displaying the high-probability remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number of times information) is performed on the image display device 14.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the time reduction flag in the time reduction flag storage area. When the main CPU 101a determines that the time saving flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S350-8, and when it is determined that the time saving flag is turned on, the main CPU 101a turns on the time saving flag in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-6. , The time-saving game state setting process is performed to set the number of times that the game can be executed (Ja) in the time-saving game state remaining number counter.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 101a sets the time reduction number of times designation command corresponding to the time reduction game state remaining number of times (J) set in the time reduction game state remaining number of times counter in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the time saving remaining number of times information (also referred to as remaining time saving number of times information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, sets a game state designation command indicating the state of the current game condition in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S350-9, the special feature is set. 0 is set in the figure special electric processing data, and the processing is transferred to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the command indicating the remaining number of times of the time saving game state (J) is transmitted as the command for specifying the number of time saving games, but it may be a command indicating the number of times of the variation display executed in the time saving game state. Further, although the command indicating the remaining number of high-probability gaming states (X) is transmitted as the high-probability number-of-times designation command, it may be a command indicating the number of fluctuation displays executed in the high-probability gaming state.

Further, although the time reduction number of times specification command and the high probability number of times specification command are transmitted to the effect control board 102 separately from the game state specification command, the time reduction game state remaining number of times (J) and the high probability game state remaining number of times (J) and the high probability game state remaining number of times ( X) may be included in the game state designation command and transmitted to the effect control board 102. Further, the time reduction number designation command and the high probability count designation command may not be transmitted to the effect control board 102.

(Fundamental control processing of the main control board)
FIG. 27 will be used to describe the Fuzu Fuden control process. First, the main CPU 101a loads the value of the Fuzu-fuden processing data in step S401, refers to the branch destination address from the Fuzu-fuden processing data loaded in step S402, and sets the Fuzu-fuden processing data = 0. For example, a normal symbol memory determination process including a normal symbol determination as to whether or not to execute an auxiliary game (open the second starting port 7) based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the winning gate 10. The process is transferred to (step S410), and if the normal symbol processing data = 1, the process is performed in the normal symbol variation process (step S420) when the normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol determination. If it is transferred and the normal symbol processing data = 2, the process is transferred to the normal symbol stop processing (step S430) when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped, and if the normal symbol processing data = 3. The process is transferred to the auxiliary game process (step S440) in which the opening / closing control of the second start port 7 is performed (the second start port control device 70 is operated).

(Normal symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The ordinary symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, and if it is determined that the variation display is in progress, the present normal symbol storage determination process is terminated, and the variation display is in progress. If it is determined that there is no such processing, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the normal figure hold number counter for counting the normal figure hold number (G) is 1 or more. When the number of reserved symbols (G) is "0", the variation display of the normal symbol is not performed, so the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is "1" or more, in step S410-3, the counter value (G) of the number of reserved symbols is changed to "1". 1 ”is subtracted and updated, a new normal symbol hold number (G) is set, and in step S410-4, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the subtracted normal figure hold number (G) is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the number of reserved figures (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, the normal map determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the storage unit of the previous number. At this time, the normal figure determination information stored in the previous storage unit is written in the predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol reservation storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the normal symbol hold display device 25 with the shift of the normal symbol determination information, specifically, to display the current number of normal symbol hold display (G), the normal symbol hold display data. Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a determination of a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a is shifted in step S410-5, and the hit determination random number in the 0th storage unit is collated with the hit determination table for the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 101b to determine whether or not the hit is achieved. Is judged. In the present embodiment, since the hit determination table is associated with the start opening winning ease state (non-time saving game state / time saving game state) (see FIG. 10A), the time saving flag storage area. Is confirmed, and the hit determination table for the normal symbol related to the current state of ease of winning the starting port is selected.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a performs a normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs the normal symbol determination by collating the random number for normal symbol determination in the 0th storage unit with the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-5. As described above, since this ordinary symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (hit / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the ordinary symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is displayed. select.

Then, in step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “normal symbol stop symbol data”), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination. The determined normal symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, and in step S410-9, a normal effect symbol designation command corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol data is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal drawing stop data is notified to the effect control board 102.

The determined normal symbol stop symbol data is used in the auxiliary game processing of FIG. 31 when determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination, and in determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit normal symbol in the normal symbol stop processing of FIG. It is also used in determining the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 7.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a determines the normal map fluctuation pattern. Specifically, since the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern is classified according to the state of ease of winning the start opening, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time saving flag storage area, and then confirms the time saving flag storage area. Select the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table related to the current start port winning ease status. Then, the main CPU 101a collates the random number for determining the normal figure fluctuation pattern in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in step S410-5, with the selected normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and collates the normal figure fluctuation pattern (normal figure). Fluctuation time) is determined.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The normal figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the variation display of the normal symbol starts by receiving this command, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S410-13, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol fluctuation display data in order to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 22, and if the result of the hit determination is a hit, in step S410-14. , The auxiliary game reference data is determined by collating the normal figure stop symbol data with the auxiliary game reference data determination table, and is set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 101a sets "1" in the normal symbol processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation processing. The data for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the mode of the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation time.

(Normal symbol variation processing of main control board)
Next, the ordinary symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29. First, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol ends in step S420-1, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol variation time set in step S410-12 has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter). = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the variation display of the normal symbol is not completed, the normal symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets the normal effect symbol stop designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S420-3, it is normal based on the normal effect symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. The normal figure stop display data for stop display is set in the symbol display device 22. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the auxiliary game counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the normal symbol processing data and ends the normal symbol variation processing.

(Normal symbol stop processing of main control board)
Next, the normal symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol ends, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed in step S420-4. Whether or not (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the stop display of the normal symbol is not completed, the normal symbol stop process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the normal symbol is finished, in step S430-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop process is "hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the normal symbol. Here, if it is determined to be a hit normal symbol, the process is transferred to step S430-4, and if it is not determined to be a hit normal symbol, the process is transferred to step S430-3.

In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the normal drawing data. Then, in step S430-5, the main CPU 101a sets the opening designation command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol data in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and responds to the normal figure stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game opening process for setting the opening time in the auxiliary game timer counter is performed. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is completed, the normal symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the normal symbol processing data and ends the normal symbol stop processing.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
Auxiliary game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. First, in step S440-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S440-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S440-5.

In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S440-3.

In step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs the auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start port open / close control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and sets the second start port open / close control table in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs the second starting port opening process. In the second start port opening process, first, the value stored in the normal electric operation number storage area (“1” is added to the general electric operation number (D) and stored. Then, in order to operate the normal movable piece 70A. The energization start data of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set in, and the current normal electric operation number (D) is used with reference to the second starting port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3. The opening time of the second starting port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. The ending here means a period from the end of the final opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, when the main CPU 101a determines that the ending is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S440-12, and when it is determined that the ending is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S440-6.

In step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second starting port 7 is open. When the main CPU 101a determines that the second starting port 7 is being opened, whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the second starting port 7 is satisfied in step S440-7. To judge. As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the starting port specified winning counter has reached the specified (maximum) number (for example, 10), or the opening time of the second starting port 7 has elapsed (one opening time). Auxiliary game timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S440-8, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process. ..

In step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs the second starting port closing process. In the second starting port closing process, the energization stop data of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set in order to close the second starting port 7, and the second starting port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is set. The closing time of the second starting port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current solenoid operation number (D) with reference to. As a result, the second starting port 7 is closed.

In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied and the auxiliary game ends. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) is the number of times the second starting port 7 is opened in advance, or the counter value of the second starting port specified winning counter is the maximum number (for example, 10). ) Has been reached. Then, when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S440-10, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process. ..

In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game end process in which "0" is set in the normal electric operation number storage area and "0" is set in the second start opening winning rule counter. That is, the normal electric operation number storage area and the second start port regulation winning counter are cleared.

In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets the ending designation command corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect, and the ending time according to the normal figure stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-6 that the second starting port 7 is not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-13 whether or not the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. do. The closing time is also determined by whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, like the opening time. As a result, if it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and if it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S440-4.

In step S440-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S440-14 and elapses the ending time. If it is determined that the game has not been performed, the auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the normal drawing processing data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game processing.

(Control processing of production control board)
Next, the control process executed by the sub CPU 102a on the effect control board 102 will be described.

(Main processing of production control board)
First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. This main process is executed when power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a and a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a.

First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and an initialization process for initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored is performed.

In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a includes a random number for determining the icon display mode, a random number for determining the effect symbol stop display pattern, a random number for determining the look-ahead zone effect scenario, a random number for determining the final number of people, a random number for determining the precursor effect scenario, and a variation effect pattern. The effect random number update process is performed to update the effect random number used for the determination to control the effect, which is composed of the determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like.

A random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of the various random numbers constituting the effect random number. In the production random number update process, a random number counter provided for each type of random number is added by "1". A random number range is provided for each type of random number that constitutes the production random number. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, when the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without being added by "1".

Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set so as to differ depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random numbers from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counters related to the production random numbers from being completely synchronized, instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, the various production random numbers are provided with different initial value random numbers. When updating random numbers, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random number value may be newly updated from the initial value random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing on the production control board)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. This timer interrupt process is executed by generating clock pulses at predetermined cycles (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a into the stack area.

In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs a time control process for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, the process of analyzing the received command in the command analysis process is performed.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting display control process for controlling a variable display of a special symbol, an image display in a customer waiting state in which a special game (big hit game) is not executed, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a checks the input signal from the effect button detection switch 18a or the selection button detection switch 19a, and suggests the result of the jackpot determination based on the operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A. Performs an effect input control process for executing an effect or the like.

In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a can execute the game information related to the game to be notified (displayed) in the current game state (right-handed information prompting the game ball to be launched in the right area of the game area 2A, and the probability changing game state). High-probability remaining number information, which is the remaining number of variable displays, information on the remaining number of variable displays, which is the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed in the low-probability time-shortened game state, and jackpots that occur while the time-shortened game state continues. The game information display control process is performed to display the information on the number of jackpot consecutive villas, which is the number of times of the game, the left-handed information for prompting the game ball to be launched in the left area of the game area 2A, and the like) on the image display device 14.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a controls the right-handed display related to the display control of the first right-handed information (first right-handed image) to the third right-handed information (second right-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

In step S1800, the sub CPU 102a determines the left-handed display control related to the display control of the first left-handed information (first left-handed image) to the third left-handed information (second left-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

In step S1900, the sub CPU 102a performs a data output process of transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

In step S2000, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing of production control board)
The command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives the command and determines whether or not the command is stored in the receive buffer. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis, and when it determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the start opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303, and determines that the command is not the starting opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1304.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a executes a predetermined effect over the variation display (variation effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols based on the preliminary determination result, the continuous advance notice effect, the hold icon displayed on the image display device 14, and the variation. The start opening winning process for determining the so-called look-ahead notice effect such as the icon change notice for changing the display mode of the middle icon and setting the information related to the look-ahead notice effect is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated. The processing at the time of winning the starting port will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In the present embodiment, as the continuous advance notice effect, the pre-reading zone effect and the change of the advance notice target, in which the image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 perform the zone precursor effect and the zone effect in one or a plurality of change effects including the change effect of the notice target. A continuous step-up notice effect in which the image display device 14 and the effect accessory device 17 perform a stepwise step effect over one or more variation effects including the effect, and one or more variation effects before the change effect to be notified. A chance to stop and display the effect symbols (TZ1 to TZ3) on the image display device 14 in an arrangement having a predetermined regularity. The image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 perform a predetermined effect effect over one or a plurality of variation effects including a dialogue notice effect in which the display device 14 and the audio output device 15 perform a predetermined dialogue effect, and a variation effect to be notified. Five types of effect notice effects to be performed are executed.

In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1305, and determines that the command is not a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1306.

In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of special figure reservations (U1, U2) stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, which will be described later, in response to the special symbol storage designation command, or the effect information hold storage area. This command analysis is performed by performing hold information update processing for shifting various effect information stored in the image display device 14 and displaying the number of hold icons (hold specific information) corresponding to the number of special figure holds on the image display device 14. End the process. The pending information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307, and determines that the command is not a game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1309.

In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a performs a game state update process for updating the game state stored in the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 102c to the game state specified by the game state designation command. In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode setting process for setting any of a plurality of effect modes related to the execution of the variable effect, and ends the command analysis process. The effect mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of the variation effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to the variation display of the special symbol executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. ), In the present embodiment, there are roughly three types of effect modes: effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C.

The effect mode A is a normal effect mode indicating that the game is in a disadvantageous game state for the player, which is set in response to the normal game state, which is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. The effect mode B is an effect mode indicating that the game state is the most advantageous to the player, which is set in response to the probabilistic game state, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. The effect mode C is an effect mode indicating that the game state is the second most advantageous game state set in response to the low probability time-saving game state, which is the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state.

In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310, and determines that the command is not the effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1311.

In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a is stopped on the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, that is, on a predetermined effective line as a result of the variation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the variation display of the special symbol. Performs the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process for determining the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the special figure variation pattern specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1312, and determines that the command is not the special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1316. ..

In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining the variation effect pattern, which is the effect content (aspect) of the variation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the variation display of the special symbol. The variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the correct effect that deterministically notifies that the result of the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is a big hit, and determines whether or not to execute the correct effect (one-shot notification effect). Performs the correct effect determination process for determining the execution mode. The accuracy effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to start the look-ahead zone effect, which is a kind of pre-reading notice (effect) based on the pre-determination result, and determines whether to start the look-ahead zone effect execution determination. Perform processing. The look-ahead zone effect execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a simply refers to a hold icon or a changing icon (hereinafter, both the holding icon and the changing icon) displayed on the image display device 14 based on the preliminary determination result as an “icon”. In addition, the icon change notice execution that determines whether or not to change the action effect (also referred to as "pending specific information") to a special mode or a different type of special mode with the execution of the action effect (throwing kiss notice, handshake event notice) Judgment processing is performed, and this command analysis processing is terminated. The icon change notice execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the special figure fluctuation stop designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it shifts the process to step S1317, and when it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it shifts the process to step S1319. ..

In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect symbol variation stop process in which an effect symbol stop control command indicating that the effect symbol is stopped and the variation effect is terminated is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The effect symbol fluctuation stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. Upon receiving the effect symbol stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect ends, display the stop of the effect symbol, and end the variation effect.

In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a look-ahead zone effect end determination process for ending the look-ahead zone effect and the Gase zone precursor effect, triggered by the end of the variation display of the special symbol, and ends the command analysis process. The look-ahead zone effect end determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a high-probability number-of-times designation command or a time-saving number-of-time designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a high-probability number-of-times specification command or a time-saving number-of-time specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1320 and determines that the command is not a high-probability number-of-times specification command or a time-saving number-of-time specification command. Then, the process is transferred to step S1321.

In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a updates the high probability remaining number of times, which is the remaining number of fluctuation displays (variation effect) that can be executed in the probabilistic game state based on the received high probability number of times designation command, or specifies the received time reduction number of times. Based on the command, the remaining number of times is updated, which is the remaining number of times of the variation display (variation effect) that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving game state, and the command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the opening designation command of the jackpot game. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the opening designation command for the jackpot game, it shifts the process to step S1322, and when it determines that there is no jackpot game opening designation command, it shifts the process to step S1324.

In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a determines an opening effect pattern, which is an effect mode of the opening effect performed during the opening of the jackpot game, and sets an opening effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined opening effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Performs the opening effect pattern determination process.

The opening effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the opening effect of the jackpot game.

In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of consecutive villas, which is the number of consecutive villas that occur continuously while the time-saving game state (including the high-accuracy time-shortening and the low-accuracy time-saving) continues. Performs processing and ends this command analysis processing.

Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed during the normal game state, the number of consecutive villas is set to "1", and the jackpot is set during the time-saving game state (including the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state). When the game is executed, a process of adding "1" to the number of consecutive villas is performed.

In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1325, and determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1326.

In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern, which is a mode of the round effect performed during the round of the jackpot game, and sets a round effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The round effect pattern determination process is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated. The round effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900, and the round effect of the jackpot game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the ending designation command for the jackpot game (big hit game ending designation command). When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the jackpot game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1327, and when it determines that the command is not the jackpot game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends this command analysis process.

In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a determines an ending effect pattern, which is an effect mode of the ending effect performed during the ending of the jackpot game, and sets an ending effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The jackpot game ending effect pattern determination process is performed, and this command analysis process is terminated. The ending effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

(Explanation of look-ahead zone production, icon display, icon display area)
Before explaining the start opening winning process shown in FIG. 36, first, the look-ahead zone effect, the hold icon display, the changing icon display, and the like performed based on the pre-judgment result and the like indicated by the starting opening winning designation command will be described. ..

(Look-ahead zone production)
First, the look-ahead zone production will be described. The look-ahead zone effect suggests that the expectation (expected value) of winning the jackpot is high over one or more variable effects (variable display of special symbols) (expecting the execution of a special game). It is a look-ahead advance notice effect, and in the present embodiment, it can be executed in the effect mode A set in the normal gaming state, and is performed based on the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command.

While the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the zone background image dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (there is a part not shown), and the zone BGM dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect outputs audio. Output from the device 15, zone lighting dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect is executed in the effect lighting device 16. In addition, the zone background image, the zone BGM, and the zone illumination can be collectively referred to as a zone effect.

In addition, as an effect related to the look-ahead zone effect, a zone fanning effect is provided. The zone fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed, and in the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol, a special effect symbol dedicated to the zone fanning effect (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol") is used. It is done using. In addition, in this embodiment, the zone fanning effect is performed by using a special effect symbol dedicated to the zone fanning effect, but it is also possible to perform the zone fanning effect using a special effect pattern different from the usual one, although it is not dedicated to the zone fanning effect. , It is also possible to stop and display the chance eye (combination of predetermined production symbols) by using a normal production symbol. Further, the zone fanning effect can be performed by using another effect image (character or the like) instead of the effect symbol, and another effect device other than the image display device 14 (for example, an audio output device 15 or an effect) can be used. It is also possible to perform the effect by causing the lighting device 16 or the like to perform the effect of a predetermined mode.

In the present embodiment, as the types of the zone fanning effect, a zone fanning success effect and a zone fanning failure effect are provided. The zone fanning success effect is composed of an effect of fanning whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed and an effect of notifying that the look-ahead zone effect is executed after the effect. In the zone fanning success effect, it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is executed by stopping and displaying the combination of preset special symbols. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is executed from the start of the variation display (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol that is started after the zone fanning success effect is executed.

On the other hand, the zone fanning failure effect is composed of an effect of fanning whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed and an effect of notifying that the look-ahead zone effect after the effect is not executed. In the zone fanning failure effect, it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed because only a part of the preset combination of special symbols is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is not executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (including the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect) that is started after the zone fanning failure effect is executed. However, it is possible to execute the zone fanning success effect in the variable display of the effect symbol (including the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect) that is started after the zone fanning failure effect is executed. The look-ahead zone effect will be executed from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (including the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect) that is started after the zone fanning success effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, as the special symbol used for the zone fanning effect, a special symbol containing the characters "look-ahead" (called a "look-ahead" symbol) and a special symbol containing the characters "zone" ("zone"). A special symbol (called a "rush" symbol) containing the characters "rush" is set. The zone fanning effect in which all the special symbols of these "look-ahead" symbols, "zone" symbols, and "rush" symbols are stopped and displayed is the "zone fanning success effect", and these "look-ahead" symbols and "zone" symbols And the zone fanning effect in which only some special symbols of the "rush" symbol are stopped and displayed is the "zone fanning failure effect". The zone fanning failure effect is the zone fanning failure effect 1 in which the "look-ahead" symbol and the "zone" symbol are stopped and displayed as some special symbols, and the zone in which only the "look-ahead" symbol is stopped and displayed as some special symbols. It consists of a fanning failure production 2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbols are stopped one by one. For example, in the zone fanning success production, the "look-ahead" symbol stops first, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating, and then "rushes". All special symbols are aligned by stopping the symbols at the preset stop position. Then, the period from the first stop of the "look-ahead" symbol to the final stop of the "rush" symbol constitutes an effect of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the zone fanning failure effect, for example, the "look-ahead" symbol stops first, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating. , Sliding past a preset stop position, resulting in only some special symbols. Then, the period from the first stop of the "look-ahead" symbol to the sliding of the "rush" symbol constitutes the effect of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, as the mode in which "all special symbols are aligned", the "look-ahead" symbol, the "zone" symbol, and the "rush" symbol are gradually stopped, but all these special symbols are aligned at the same time. In other words, it is also possible to make all the special symbols suddenly align without executing the effect of whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed.

(Icon display)
Next, the hold icon display and the changing icon display will be described. The hold icon display is to display the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 141 and the second hold icon display area 143, which will be described later. For the hold icon, the special symbol determination information is stored in the main RAM 101c in the first start port detection signal input process in step S230 or the second start port detection signal input process in step S240, and the special symbol variation display (or special symbol lottery) is performed. ), But the change display of the special symbol cannot be started immediately. Therefore, the right to execute the change display of the special symbol in the hold state (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol hold"). ), Which is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

The hold icons are the first hold icon representing the right to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 6, and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 7. Includes a second hold icon representing the right to execute (hereinafter, when both the first hold icon and the second hold icon are referred to, it is simply referred to as a "hold icon").

The changing icon display is to display the changing icon in the changing icon display area 142, which will be described later. The changing icon is an icon (image) representing the changing display of the special symbol being executed corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the storage area of the special symbol of the main RAM 101c, and is the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed in. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition of the symbol variation display is satisfied for the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon, it corresponds to the symbol variation display related to the establishment of the start condition. The hold icon is displayed as a fluctuating icon. In the following, when both the hold icon and the changing icon are referred to, they are simply referred to as "icons".

In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as the display mode of the icon. The normal mode is a standard display mode for the icon, and the special mode is a special display mode that suggests or informs a preset predetermined item. In the present embodiment, one type of normal mode is set, and the special mode is classified into a plurality of types according to the content to be suggested or notified. In the present embodiment, the special modes are classified into the first to fourth special modes, and the hold icon is changed as a look-ahead notice effect by displaying the hold icon in the special mode or changing the type of the special mode. The notice is executed, and the changing icon change notice is executed by displaying the changing icon in a special mode or changing the type of the special mode. The display mode of the icon is not limited to these normal modes, the first special mode, the second special mode, the third special mode, and the fourth special mode, and can be appropriately set.

The normal mode is a standard display mode and serves as a reference for preset predetermined items. As shown in FIG. 59, the shape of the icon in the normal mode is circular, and the color of the icon in the normal mode is white.

The first special aspect is a display mode that suggests the possibility of winning a big hit and / or the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, and can also be said to be a display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of changing to another special mode. In this embodiment, only one type is set. As shown in FIG. 59, the icon of the first special aspect has a circular shape, and the color of the icon of the first special aspect is blinking white. That is, it can be said that the first special mode is a state in which the normal mode is blinking. Regarding the jackpot winning expectation degree suggested by the first special aspect, the normal aspect <the first special aspect.

The second special aspect is a display mode that suggests the possibility of winning a big hit and / or the expected degree of winning a big hit. Eight types of second special modes 11 to 15 and second special modes 21 to 23 are set.

As shown in FIG. 59, the shapes of the icons of the second special aspects 11 to 15 are the same in the silhouette of one person regardless of the type, and the colors of the icons of the second special aspects 11 to 15 are of different types. Depends on. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 11 is white, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 12 is green, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 13 is red, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 14 is red. Is a zebra pattern, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 15 is rainbow color.

Regarding the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot according to the second special aspect 11 to 15, the normal aspect <first special aspect <second special aspect 11 <second special aspect 12 <second special aspect 13 <second special aspect 14 <second It is higher in the order of the special aspect 15. The second special aspect 15 suggests that the jackpot winning expectation is 100%, that is, notifies the jackpot winning.

Further, the second special aspect 11 to 14 can occur for both the hold icon and the changing icon, but the second special aspect 15 occurs only for the changing icon. This is because the hold icon representing the special figure hold is displayed in the second special aspect 15, and if the jackpot winning is notified at the stage when the variable display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold has not started, the interest of the game is lowered. This is because there is a risk. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special aspect 15.

As shown in FIG. 59, the shape of the icon of the second special aspect 21 to 23 is circular regardless of the type, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 21 to 23 differs depending on the type. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 21 is yellow and the character "SP" suggesting the execution of the SP / SPSP reach effect is drawn, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 22 is purple and a big hit is expected. The letters "super heat" suggesting that the degree is high are drawn, and the letters "certain" suggesting that the color of the icon of the second special aspect 23 is golden and a big hit is drawn.

The jackpot winning expectation according to the second special aspect 21 to 23 is higher in the order of normal aspect <first special aspect <second special aspect 21 <second special aspect 22 <second special aspect 23. The second special aspect 23 suggests that the jackpot winning expectation is 100%, that is, notifies the jackpot winning.

Further, the second special aspect 21 and 22 may occur for both the hold icon and the changing icon, but the second special aspect 23 occurs only for the changing icon. This is because the hold icon indicating the special figure hold is displayed in the second special aspect 23, and if the jackpot winning is notified at the stage when the variable display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold has not started, the interest of the game is lowered. This is because there is a risk. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special aspect 23.

In the present embodiment, the normal mode and the first special mode are common modes used regardless of whether they are in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (including high-accuracy time-saving and low-accuracy time-saving). The second special aspects 11 to 15 are normal limited modes used only in the normal gaming state, and the second special aspects 21 to 23 are in the time-saving gaming state (including high-accuracy time-saving and low-accuracy time-saving). It is a time-saving limited mode that is used in a limited manner.

That is, the type of icon (number of changes) displayed on the image display device 14 in the normal game state is set to be larger than the type (number of changes) of the icon displayed on the image display device 14 in the time-saving game state. Has been done. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored in the normal gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol tends to be longer than in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, since the number of icon types (number of changes) in the time-saving game state is small, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the change of the icon in the time-saving game state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol tends to be shorter than in the normal game state. Become.

It should be noted that the normal mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode are not common to the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (including the high-accuracy time-saving and the low-accuracy time-saving), but the normal mode for the time-saving gaming state (including the high-accuracy time-saving and the low-accuracy time-saving). For example, the icon shape is a square and the icon color is blue), the first special mode for the time saving game state (for example, the icon shape is a square and the icon color is blinking blue), the time saving game state. The second special aspect (for example, the shape of the icon is a square and the color of the icon is the same) may be set. Further, the normal mode and the first special mode may be different between the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state.

The third special aspect suggests the degree of expectation for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (hereinafter, referred to as "the degree of expectation for execution of the look-ahead zone"). When the types of the third special aspect are roughly classified, six types of the third special aspects 1 to 6 having different suggestion expectations for execution of the look-ahead effect are set.

Here, the third special aspects 1 to 3 (11 to 35) are icons corresponding to the start opening winning designation command for executing the look-ahead zone effect or the zone fanning effect (hereinafter, referred to as "zone effect target icon"). ), And the third special aspect 4 to 6 (41 to 65) is an icon that is not an icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command that causes the look-ahead zone effect or the zone fanning effect to be executed (hereinafter, It is a display mode of (referred to as "zone effect non-target icon"). In other words, the zone effect non-target icon is the icon corresponding to the start port prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that is to execute the look-ahead zone effect or zone fanning effect (before). Or an icon) in which a variable effect is executed later.

As shown in FIG. 60, the icon shape of the third special mode 1 to 3 (11 to 35) is a shape including the icon shape according to the second special mode. Specifically, in the icon of the third special aspect 1 (11 to 15), the silhouette of one person is arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. At the same time, the character "? Zone?", Which suggests the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, is attached to the central part. The icon of the third special aspect 2 (21 to 25) has the silhouettes of two people arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect, and is substantially in the center. Is composed of "Δ zone Δ", which indicates that the look-ahead zone effect is executed and that the expectation level of the execution is higher than that of "? Zone?" In the third special aspect 1. The icon of the third special aspect 3 (31 to 35) has four person silhouettes on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect, and is substantially in the center. Is composed of a character "○ zone ○" that notifies the execution of the look-ahead zone effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the shape of the icon of the third special aspect 4 to 6 (41 to 65) also has a shape including the shape of the icon according to the second special mode. Specifically, in the icon of the third special aspect 4 (41 to 45), the silhouette of one person is arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. It is composed. The icon of the third special aspect 5 (51 to 55) has a configuration in which the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. .. The icon of the third special aspect 6 (61 to 65) has a configuration in which silhouettes of three people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. .. In the third special aspect 4 to the third special aspect 6, characters such as "? Zone?" Are not added as in the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 3. That is, it is also suggested that the "? Zone?" Of the third special aspect 1, the "△ zone △" of the third special aspect 2, and the "○ zone ○" of the third special aspect 3 are zone production target icons, respectively. ing.

The pre-reading zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect target icon is higher in the order of (normal aspect <) second special aspect <third special aspect 1 <third special aspect 2 <third special aspect 3. On the other hand, the pre-reading zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect non-target icon increases in the order of (normal aspect <) second special aspect <third special aspect 4 <third special aspect 5 <third special aspect 6. There is.

Here, the reason why the second special mode is included in the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect target icon and the zone effect non-target icon is that the display mode of the icon is the second special mode and the third special mode. This is because the zone precursor effect that suggests or notifies the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the second special aspect also suggests the read-ahead zone execution expectation level.

As described above, the iconic figures of the second special aspect and the third special aspect include the silhouette of a person, the number of silhouettes of the icon of the second special aspect is "1", and the third special aspect 1 The number of silhouettes of the icons of 4 is "3", the number of silhouettes of the icons of the 3rd special modes 2 and 5 is "5", and the number of silhouettes of the icons of the 3rd special modes 3 and 6 is "5". Is "7" people. And, the larger the number of icon silhouettes, the higher the expectation of pre-reading zone execution.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third special aspect 1 and the third special aspect 4, the third special aspect 2 and the third special aspect 5, and the third special aspect 3 and the third special aspect 6 are each the display mode. It is assumed that the attributes of the icons that are the target of the above (zone effect target icon and zone effect non-target icon) are different, but they are in a corresponding relationship and the same look-ahead zone execution expectation is set. That is, the read-ahead zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 1 and the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 4 are the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 2 and the third special aspect 2 are the same. 3 The look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the special aspect 5 is the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 3 and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 6 are the same. ..

Further, the third special aspects 3 and 6 suggest that the read-ahead zone execution expectation degree is 100%, that is, notify that the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the icon is displayed in the third special modes 3 and 6 even when the look-ahead zone effect is being executed. Therefore, the third special aspects 3 and 6 may notify that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed.

In the following, the third special aspects 1 and 4 will be referred to as "look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1", and the third special aspects 2 and 5 will be referred to as "look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2". Aspects 3 and 6 are referred to as a "look-ahead zone effect notification mode". Further, when both the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 and the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 are referred to, it is simply referred to as a "look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode".

Further, as described above, the shape of the icon according to the third special aspect is composed of the silhouette of a person, and includes the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. The silhouette part of one person according to the above is the main silhouette part, and the silhouette part of the person on the left side and the right side of the main silhouette part is the sub-silhouette part.

As with the second special aspect, a plurality of types of colors are set for the main silhouette portion of the icon according to each of the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 6. The third special aspect 1 is divided into the third special aspect 11 to the third special aspect 15 and the third special aspect 2 is divided into the third special aspect 21 to the third special aspect 25 according to the color of the main silhouette portion. , The third special aspect 3 is divided into the third special aspect 31 to the third special aspect 35, the third special aspect 4 is divided into the third special aspect 41 to the third special aspect 45, and the third special aspect 5 is the third special aspect 5. The three special aspects 51 to the third special aspect 55 are divided, and the third special aspect 6 is divided into the third special aspect 61 to the third special aspect 65.

The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 11, the third special aspect 21, the third special aspect 31, the third special aspect 41, the third special aspect 51, and the third special aspect 61 is white. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 12, the third special aspect 22, the third special aspect 32, the third special aspect 42, the third special aspect 52, and the third special aspect 62 is green. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 13, the third special aspect 23, the third special aspect 33, the third special aspect 43, the third special aspect 53, and the third special aspect 63 is red. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 14, the third special aspect 24, the third special aspect 34, the third special aspect 44, the third special aspect 54, and the third special aspect 64 is a zebra pattern. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 35 and the third special aspect 65 is rainbow color. Then, as in the second special aspect, the color of the main silhouette portion of the third special aspect suggests the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, and the colors are higher in the order of white <green <red <zebra pattern <rainbow color.

On the other hand, the fourth special aspect suggests or informs a predetermined matter regarding the handshake event notice. The handshake event notice is a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the expectation of winning a big hit by changing the display mode of the changing icon based on the preliminary judgment result indicated by the start opening prize designation command. It can be executed in mode A. Although it may be performed based on the judgment result at the start of the variable effect, the details of the handshake event notice will be described later.

When the types of the fourth special aspect are roughly classified, four types of the fourth special aspect 1 to the fourth special aspect 4 are set. Here, the fourth special aspect 1 (11 to 15) is a changing icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake event notice to be executed (hereinafter, referred to as “handshake event notice target changing icon”). The fourth special aspect 2 (21 to 24) is a hold icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake event notice to be executed (hereinafter, referred to as “handshake event notice target hold icon”). ), And the fourth special aspect 3 (31) is a changing icon (hereinafter, “handshake”) corresponding to a start opening prize designation command that is not a start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake event notice to be executed. The display mode (referred to as "untargeted changing icon"), and the fourth special mode 4 (41) corresponds to a start mouth prize designation command that is not a start mouth prize designation command that causes the handshake event notice to be executed. This is a display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “handshake event notice non-target hold icon”).

In other words, the handshake event notice non-target hold icon is the icon (before or after) corresponding to the start mouth prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start mouth prize designation command that caused the handshake event notice to be executed. It is an icon) in which a variable effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 62, the shape of the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 1 (11 to 15) is a silhouette of a person shaking hands viewed from the side and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. It is composed of and. The shape of the hold icon in the fourth special aspect 2 (21 to 24) is composed of a silhouette of a person in a predetermined pose viewed from the front and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. The "heart" commonly attached to the icons of the 4th special aspect 1 and the 4th special aspect 2 indicates that the handshake event is subject to notice.

Further, the shape of the changing icon in the fourth special aspect 3 (31) is composed of the silhouette of the same person as the changing icon according to the fourth special aspect 1, and the heart is as in the fourth special aspect 1. Not attached. The shape of the hold icon in the fourth special aspect 4 (41) is also composed of the same silhouette of the person as the hold icon according to the fourth special aspect 2, and is not attached with a heart as in the fourth special aspect 2. ..

Further, as in the case of the second special aspect, a plurality of kinds of colors are set for the silhouette portion of the person included in the icons of the fourth special aspect 1 to the fourth special aspect 2. The fourth special aspect 1 is divided into five types of the fourth special aspect 11 to the fourth special aspect 15 according to the color of the silhouette portion, and the fourth special aspect 2 is the fourth special aspect 21 to the fourth special aspect 24. It is divided into four types.

The color of the icon silhouette portion according to the fourth special aspect 11 and the fourth special aspect 21 is white, the color of the icon silhouette portion according to the fourth special aspect 12 and the fourth special aspect 22 is green, and the fourth The color of the icon silhouette portion according to the special aspect 13 and the fourth special aspect 23 is red, the color of the icon silhouette portion according to the fourth special aspect 14 and the fourth special aspect 24 is a zebra pattern, and the fourth special aspect The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to the fifteenth aspect is rainbow color.

The reason why the rainbow color is set only in the fourth special aspect 1 is that the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed in rainbow color, and the variable display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold corresponding to the icon has not started. This is because if the jackpot winning is notified at the stage, the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and it is possible to provide a rainbow-colored display mode for the hold icon subject to the handshake event notice.

Further, in the present embodiment, the color related to the handshake event notice non-target changing icon and the handshake event notice asymmetric hold icon is one type of white, but a plurality of types are set and the handshake event notice target changing icon is set. And, as with the handshake event notice target hold icon, the color can indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

As described above, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the display mode of the icon, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode and from a certain special mode to a different special mode during the game. By doing so, the interest of the game is improved. The change pattern of the icon display mode will be described later.

(Icon display area)
Next, the hold icon display areas 141 and 143 for displaying the hold icon and the changing icon display area 142 for displaying the changing icon will be described. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the hold icon display areas 141 and 143 and the changing icon display area 142 are formed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

The first hold icon display area 141 on which the first hold icon is displayed is formed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and the second hold icon display area 143 on which the second hold icon is displayed is on the lower right side of the display unit 140. The changing icon display area 142 formed in the above and displaying the changing icon is formed between the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143 so as not to overlap each other.

The first reserved icon display area 141 is divided into a first display unit 141a, a second display unit 141b, a third display unit 141c, and a fourth display unit 141d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. The display units 141a to 141d correspond to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c.

Therefore, the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 141a represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 141b. The first hold icon displayed on the above represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the third display unit 141c. The icon represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 141d is the first special symbol. Represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

The second hold icon display area 143 is divided into a first display unit 143a, a second display unit 143b, a third display unit 143c, and a fourth display unit 143d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. Each display unit 143a to 143d corresponds to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c.

Therefore, the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 143a represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 143b. The second hold icon displayed in represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed in the third display unit 143c. The icon represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 143d is the second special symbol. Represents a special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

Further, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 represents the changing display of the special symbol currently being executed based on the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit). ..

The changing icon display area 142 on which the changing icon is displayed is provided on the pedestal image D in order to clearly distinguish it from the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143. The broken line portion in FIG. 82A is for indicating each display portion and the display area, and is not actually displayed, but may be displayed.

(Processing when the start port of the production control board wins a prize)
FIG. 36 will be described with reference to the start port winning process of the effect control board 102.

In step S1303-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command determined to have been received in step S1304 in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

As shown in FIG. 37A, the effect information hold storage area includes a first special figure hold number storage area in which the first special figure hold number (U1) is stored and a second special figure hold number (U2). The second special figure reserved number storage area to be stored, the first effect information reserved storage area for storing the effect information related to the look-ahead notice (effect) based on the result of the first pre-determination process, and the second pre-determination process. The second effect information reservation storage area in which the effect information related to the pre-reading notice (effect) based on the result of is stored, and the effect information shifted from the first effect information hold storage area or the second effect information hold storage area are stored. Production information It is composed of the storage area.

The first effect information reservation storage area and the second effect information reservation storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit like the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c. Has been done. In addition, the effect information storage area corresponds to the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol currently being executed, and is a storage area common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area. Therefore, for convenience, it is set as the 0th storage unit.

As shown in FIG. 37B, each storage unit has, as a storage area for the effect information related to the look-ahead notice (effect), a start port prize designation command area in which the start port prize designation command is stored, and a continuous notice effect. It includes a continuous notice effect execution information area for storing continuous notice effect execution information representing a scenario and the like, and an icon display mode scenario area for storing scenario data of an icon display mode representing a scenario of an icon display mode described later.

In step S1303-1, if the received start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command, the number of the first special figure reserved among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first effect information reservation storage area. Store in the storage unit corresponding to (U1). If the received start opening prize designation command is the second start opening prize designation command, the number of the second special figure reserved (U2) among the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information reservation storage area is set. Store in the corresponding storage unit.

In step S1303-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the jackpot variation effect is currently in progress based on the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, which will be described later. The variation effect data is identification information indicating the effect content of the variation effect, but the variation effect data also includes a jackpot determination result that triggers the execution of the variation effect. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the jackpot variation effect is in progress, the process shifts to step S1303-7, and when it determines that the jackpot variation effect is not in progress, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-3.

In step S1303-3, the sub CPU 102a is already stored in the effect information hold storage area (first effect information hold storage area or second effect information hold storage area) of the sub RAM 102c that newly stores the start opening winning designation command. It is determined whether or not all the pre-judgment results related to the start opening winning designation command (variation display executed in advance) are "loss without reach". When the sub CPU 102a determines that all of them are "loss without reach", the process is transferred to step S1303-4, and when it is determined that all of them are not "loss without reach", the process is transferred to steps S1303-19.

In step S1303-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the above-mentioned continuous advance notice effect execution information is stored in the continuous advance notice effect execution information area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the continuous advance notice effect execution information is stored, the process shifts to step SS1303-5, and when it determines that the continuous notice effect execution information is not stored, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step SS1303-8.

In step S1303-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect execution information stored in the continuous advance notice effect execution information area of the sub RAM 102c is the look-ahead zone effect execution information. When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the look-ahead zone effect execution information, it shifts the process to step S1303-6, and when it determines that it is not the look-ahead zone effect execution information, it shifts the process to step S1303-7.

The sub CPU 102a corresponds to the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect executed based on the look-ahead zone effect execution information in step S1303-6, and the hold icon corresponding to the start opening winning designation command received this time (zone effect non-zone effect). Determine the zone precursor effect icon display mode scenario for changing the display mode of the target icon) to the look-ahead zone effect notification mode (look-ahead zone effect notification mode, look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2). Then, the process is transferred to step S1303-20.

In step S1303-7, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display mode scenario for not changing the display mode of the hold icon and shifts the process to step S1303-20. That is, the execution of the icon change notice is restricted while a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as during the change effect of the jackpot or during the execution of the continuous notice effect other than the look-ahead zone effect.

In step S1303-8, the sub CPU 102a is the corresponding special figure hold number (first special figure hold number or second special figure hold number) which is the special figure hold number corresponding to the type of the special symbol specified by the start port winning designation command received this time. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures) is greater than 0. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the number of reserved special figures is larger than 0, the process shifts to step S1303-9, and when it determines that the number of reserved special figures is not larger than 0, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19.

In step S1303-9, the sub CPU 102a has a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect) in which the result of the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol targeted for the continuous advance notice effect is lost is completed. It is determined whether or not it is within (once). When the sub CPU 102a determines that the number of fluctuations is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process shifts to step S1303-19, and when it determines that the number of fluctuations is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-10.

In step S1303-10, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the continuous advance notice effect, and in step S1303-11, determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed and the type of the continuous advance notice effect to be executed. A table (see FIG. 38) is selected, and a continuous advance notice determination process for determining the continuous advance notice effect is performed by collating the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command with a random number for determining the continuous advance notice effect. The details of the continuous advance notice effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1303-12 whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the process is transferred to step S1303-13, and when it is determined that the non-execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19.

In step S1303-13, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of branching to the next step to be executed depending on the result of the continuous advance notice effect determination process of step S1303-11. Specifically, when executing the look-ahead zone effect, the process is transferred to step S1303-14, and when executing the continuous step-up advance notice effect, the process is transferred to step S1303-15, and the chance eye advance notice effect is executed. In that case, the process is transferred to step S1303-16, the process is transferred to step S1303-17 when executing the dialogue advance notice effect, and the process is transferred to step S1303-18 when executing the effect advance notice effect.

In step S1303-14, the sub CPU 102a determines an execution mode of the look-ahead zone effect in which the image display device 14 and the audio output device perform the zone precursor effect and the zone effect in one or more variation effects including the variation effect to be announced. The pre-reading zone effect mode determination process for the purpose is performed, and the process is transferred to step S1303-20. The look-ahead zone effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S1303-15, the sub CPU 102a performs a continuous step-up notice effect in which the image display device 14 and the effect accessory device 17 perform a stepwise step effect over one or a plurality of variation effects including the variation effect to be announced. The continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process for determining the execution mode of the above is performed, and the process is transferred to steps S1303-19. The continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 (a).

In step S1303-16, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the effect symbols (TZ1 to TZ3) on the image display device 14 in an array having a predetermined regularity over one or a plurality of variation effects before the variation effect to be announced. The chance eye advance notice effect mode determination process for determining the execution mode of the chance eye advance notice effect effect is performed, and the process is transferred to step S1303-19. The process of determining the mode of the chance eye notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 (b).

In step S1303-17, the sub CPU 102a determines an execution mode of the dialogue advance notice effect in which the image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 perform a predetermined dialogue effect over one or a plurality of variation effects including the variation effect to be announced. The process of determining the mode of the advance notice effect for the dialogue is performed, and the process is transferred to steps S1303-19. The serif notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 (a).

In step S1303-18, the sub CPU 102a determines an execution mode of the effect advance notice effect in which the image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 perform a predetermined effect effect over one or a plurality of change effects including the change effect to be announced. The effect advance notice effect mode determination process is performed, and the process is transferred to steps S1303-19. The effect notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 (b).

In step S1303-19, the sub CPU 102a displays an icon displayed on the image display device 14 based on the pre-determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command. The icon change notice determination process for determining the icon display mode scenario, which is the display scenario of the above, is performed. The icon change notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

In step S1303-20, the sub CPU 102a sends an icon effect control command indicating an icon display mode scenario determined in the processes such as step S1303-6, step S1303-7, and step 1303-19 to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set and finish the processing at the time of winning the main start port.

The icon effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command, the image control board 105 displays the display mode of the hold icon or the changing icon corresponding to the icon effect control command in the display mode according to the icon display mode scenario, thereby notifying the icon change. Is supposed to do.

As described above, according to the start opening winning process of the present embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is being executed or the continuous advance notice effect is scheduled to be executed, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is not executed, so that a new continuous advance notice is given. The production is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused by executing a plurality of continuous advance notice effects in duplicate.

In addition, while the execution information of the look-ahead zone effect is stored, the display mode of the hold icon (zone effect non-target icon) corresponding to the newly received start opening prize designation command is displayed in the look-ahead zone effect display mode (look-ahead). The zone effect notification mode, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2) are changed, and the zone effect asymmetric icon is displayed in the normal mode after the end of the zone precursor effect or the look-ahead zone effect. It is possible to emphasize that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the continuous notice effect is not executed within a predetermined number of times from the execution of the Gase continuous notice effect in which the result of the change display (variation effect) of the special symbol that is the target of the continuous notice effect is lost, the continuous notice effect is performed. It will not occur continuously, and it will be possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player gets tired of the continuous advance notice production and cannot have a sense of expectation. It should be noted that only the Gase continuous notice effect may not be executed within a predetermined number of fluctuations from the execution of the Gase continuous notice effect.

◆ (Continuous notice production judgment table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuous advance notice effect determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect and the type of continuous advance notice effect to be executed.

In the continuous advance notice effect judgment table shown in FIG. 38, the effect mode (game state), the type of the special symbol specified by the start opening prize designation command, and the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command are continuously displayed. The selection rate (%) based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect and the type of continuous advance notice effect to be selected are uniquely associated and stored.

The five types of continuous advance notice effects defined in the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38 are set so that the effect period (time) during one variable effect is different. Specifically, the look-ahead The production period of the zone production and the continuous step-up notice production is relatively (relatively) long, and the production period of the chance eye notice production, the dialogue notice production, and the effect notice production is relatively (relatively) short. In addition, the production period is different between each continuous notice production, and the production period of the look-ahead zone production is the longest, and at least the production period of the chance eye notice production, the dialogue notice production, and the effect notice production fluctuates. It's shorter than the time.

In addition, among the five types of continuous advance notice effects specified in the continuous advance notice effect determination table, the continuous step-up advance notice effect, the chance eye advance notice effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, and the effect advance notice effect are the movable parts of the effect device 17 for the effect. Colors such as the emission color of 17A, the color scheme (color) of the production pattern image that constitutes the chance eye, the color scheme (color) of the dialogue image, the color scheme (color) of the effect image, and so on. It is a production that announces (suggests) the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the type of.

As the first feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, the continuous advance notice effect is produced in the high accuracy / low accuracy short game state (effect modes B and C) at a lower rate than in the normal game state (effect mode A). Is set to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the continuous advance notice effect from being lowered in the time-saving game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than that in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, it may be included that the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in the high accuracy / low accuracy short game state is 0%, and in that case, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed in the high accuracy / low accuracy short game state. Become. However, even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, the execution ratios of the continuous advance notice effects of the normal game state, the high-probability time-short game state, and the low-probability time-short game state are set to the normal game state> low-probability time-short game state> high-probability time-short game state, and the normal game state> high. It is possible to achieve the same effect even when the probability time shortening game state> the low probability time reduction game state.

The second feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38 is the type of continuous advance notice effect (specifically, look-ahead zone effect, continuous step-up advance notice effect, chance eye advance notice effect) executed in the normal gaming state. , The types of continuous advance notice effects (specifically, chance eye advance notice effects, dialogue advance notice effects, effect advance notice effects) executed in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state are different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the continuous advance notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the types of continuous advance notice effects executed in the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy / low-accuracy short-time gaming state may be different so as not to overlap, and the types of continuous advance notice effects executed in all the gaming states may be different. They may be different so that they do not overlap. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the number of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in all game states may be different, or only the number of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in a specific game state may be different. Further, the type of the continuous advance notice effect executed in the normal gaming state and the type of the continuous advance notice effect executed in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state may be the same.

The third feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects having different effect periods (time) during the variation effect of 1 are set to be executed in each game state. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the continuous advance notice production becomes rich in variation, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Of the plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in each game state, at least two continuous advance notice effects have the same effect period, but at least one other continuous advance notice effect has a different effect period. You may. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the production period of all the continuous notice productions may be the same.

As the fourth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, when the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during the variation effect of 1 is relative (comparison). Continuous notice that the production period (time) during the variable production of 1 is relatively (relatively) longer than the continuous short notice production (specifically, chance eye notice production, dialogue notice production, effect notice production). One point is that the execution rate of the production (specifically, the look-ahead zone production and the continuous step-up notice production) is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the continuous advance notice effect in the normal game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be longer than in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, the continuous (relatively) short continuous advance notice effect (specifically, the chance eye advance notice effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, the effect advance notice effect) during the variable effect of 1 is executed. The ratio may be set to 0%, and even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

As a fifth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, when the variation display of the second special symbol in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-shortening game state is targeted, the effect period (time) during the variation effect of 1. Is relatively (relatively) long. The production period (time) during the variable production of 1 is relatively (relatively) shorter than that of the continuous advance notice effect (specifically, the look-ahead zone effect and the continuous step-up advance notice effect). One point is that the execution rate of continuous advance notice production (specifically, chance eye advance notice effect, dialogue advance notice effect, effect advance notice effect) is high. By doing so, the inconvenience that the continuous advance notice effect is executed halfway due to the short fluctuation time in the high accuracy / short time game state where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the normal game state does not occur, and the game It is possible to improve the interest of.

It should be noted that, in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state, the continuous advance notice effect (specifically, the look-ahead zone effect and the continuous step-up advance notice effect) in which the effect period (time) during the variable effect of 1 is relatively (relatively) long. Is not executed, but if the effect period (time) during the variable effect of 1 is lower than the execution rate of the short continuous notice effect, it may be executed. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

The sixth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38 is the high accuracy / low accuracy time-shortening game state, which is higher than the ratio of announcing the expectation of a big hit depending on the type of color in the continuous advance notice effect executed in the normal game state. One of the points is that in the continuous advance notice production performed in, the ratio of announcing the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is high depending on the type of color. By doing so, the player can intuitively grasp the content of the notice even in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that four types of continuous advance notice effects (continuous step-up advance notice effect, chance eye advance notice effect, dialogue advance notice effect, effect advance notice effect) that give notice according to the type of color are more accurate / shorter than when executed in the normal game state. The degree of expectation that the jackpot for each color of the notice and / or the degree of expectation that the SP reach effect is executed may be different from the case where the game is executed.

Specifically, taking the effect notice effect as an example, the pre-judgment result in the high-accuracy / short-time game state is higher than the ratio at which the blue effect image is displayed when the pre-judgment result is lost or normal reach in the normal game state. By setting a high rate of displaying the blue effect image when is lost or normal reach, the expectation and / or SP reach effect that becomes a big hit when the blue effect image is displayed in the normal game state is executed. The expectation that the blue effect image is displayed in the high / low accuracy short game state and / or the expectation that the SP reach effect is executed will be lower than the expected degree. And vice versa.

Further, the degree of expectation that is a big hit for the effect image of all colors and / or the degree of expectation that the SP reach effect is executed is not different between the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, for example, a predetermined degree. When an effect image of a color (for example, blue or green) is displayed, the expected degree and / or the expected degree at which the SP reach effect is executed are set in the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. Different, the expectation that will be a big hit when an effect image of a color other than the predetermined color (for example, red or rainbow) is displayed and / or the expectation that the SP reach effect will be executed is highly accurate with the normal game state / It may be the same in the low probability time short game state.

In addition, regarding the predetermined continuous advance notice effect (for example, effect advance notice effect and chance eye advance notice effect), there are cases where the game is executed in the normal game state and cases where the game is executed in the high accuracy / time saving game state, for each color of the notice. The expectation that the jackpot will be and / or the expectation that the SP reach effect will be executed will be different, and for the continuous advance notice effect other than the predetermined continuous advance notice effect (for example, the continuous step-up advance notice effect and the dialogue advance notice effect), the normal game Make sure that the expectation that the jackpot will be for each color of the notice and / or the expectation that the SP reach effect will be executed will be the same when it is executed in the state and when it is executed in the high accuracy / time saving game state. May be good.

◆ (Modification example of continuous notice production judgment table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a modified example of the continuous advance notice effect determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed and the type of the continuous advance notice effect to be executed.

In the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, the effect mode (game state), the type of the special symbol specified by the start opening prize designation command, and the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command are continuously displayed. The selection rate (%) based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect and the type of continuous advance notice effect to be selected are uniquely associated and stored.

The five types of continuous advance notice effects defined in the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39 are set so that the effect period (time) during one variable effect is different. Specifically, the look-ahead The production period of the zone production and the continuous step-up notice production is relatively (relatively) long, and the production period of the chance eye notice production, the dialogue notice production, and the effect notice production is relatively (relatively) short. In addition, the production period is different between each continuous notice production, and the production period of the look-ahead zone production is the longest, and at least the production period of the chance eye notice production, the dialogue notice production, and the effect notice production fluctuates. It's shorter than the time.

In addition, among the five types of continuous advance notice effects specified in the continuous advance notice effect determination table, the continuous step-up advance notice effect, the chance eye advance notice effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, and the effect advance notice effect are the movable parts of the effect device 17 for the effect. Colors such as the emission color of 17A, the color scheme (color) of the production pattern image that constitutes the chance eye, the color scheme (color) of the dialogue image, the color scheme (color) of the effect image, and so on. It is a production that announces (suggests) the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the type of.

As the first feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, the continuous advance notice effect is performed at a higher rate in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy short-time gaming state (effect modes B and C) than in the normal game state (effect mode A). Is set to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short-game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

It may be included that the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in the normal game state is 0%, and in that case, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed in the normal game state. However, even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, the execution ratios of the continuous advance notice effects of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state are set to the normal game state <low-probability short-time game state <high-probability short-time game state and the normal game state <high. It is possible to achieve the same effect even when the probability time short game state <low probability time short game state.

The second feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39 is the type of continuous advance notice effect (specifically, look-ahead zone effect, continuous step-up advance notice effect, chance eye advance notice effect) executed in the normal gaming state. , The types of continuous advance notice effects (specifically, chance eye advance notice effects, dialogue advance notice effects, effect advance notice effects) executed in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state are different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the continuous advance notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the types of continuous advance notice effects executed in the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy / low-accuracy short-time gaming state may be different so as not to overlap, and the types of continuous advance notice effects executed in all the gaming states may be different. They may be different so that they do not overlap. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the number of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in all game states may be different, or only the number of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in a specific game state may be different. Further, the type of the continuous advance notice effect executed in the normal gaming state and the type of the continuous advance notice effect executed in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state may be the same.

The third feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects having different effect periods (time) during the variation effect of 1 are set to be executed in each game state. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the continuous advance notice production becomes rich in variation, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Of the plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in each game state, at least two continuous advance notice effects have the same effect period, but at least one other continuous advance notice effect has a different effect period. You may. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the production period of all the continuous notice productions may be the same.

As the fourth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, when the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during the variation effect of 1 is relative (comparison). Continuous notice that the production period (time) during the variable production of 1 is relatively (relatively) longer than the continuous short notice production (specifically, chance eye notice production, dialogue notice production, effect notice production). One point is that the execution rate of the production (specifically, the look-ahead zone production and the continuous step-up notice production) is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the continuous advance notice effect in the normal game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be longer than in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

It should be noted that, in the normal game state, the continuous (relatively) short continuous advance notice effect (specifically, the chance eye advance notice effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, the effect advance notice effect) during the variable effect of 1 is executed. The ratio may be set to 0%, and even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

As a fifth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, when the variation display of the second special symbol in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-shortening game state is targeted, the effect period (time) during the variation effect of 1. Is relatively (relatively) long. The production period (time) during the variable production of 1 is relatively (relatively) shorter than that of the continuous advance notice effect (specifically, the look-ahead zone effect and the continuous step-up advance notice effect). One point is that the execution rate of continuous advance notice production (specifically, chance eye advance notice effect, dialogue advance notice effect, effect advance notice effect) is high. By doing so, the inconvenience that the continuous advance notice effect is executed halfway due to the short fluctuation time in the high accuracy / short time game state where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the normal game state does not occur, and the game It is possible to improve the interest of.

It should be noted that, in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state, the execution rate of the continuous advance notice effect in which the effect period (time) is relatively (relatively) long during the variation effect of 1 is 0%, but the variation effect of 1 is achieved. If the effect period (time) is shorter than the execution rate of the continuous advance notice effect (specifically, the look-ahead zone effect or the continuous step-up advance notice effect), the effect may be executed. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

The sixth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that the jackpot is increased depending on the type of color in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short-game state, rather than the ratio of foretelling the expectation degree of the jackpot depending on the type of color in the normal gaming state. The point is that the ratio of foretelling the degree of expectation is high. By doing so, the player can intuitively grasp the content of the notice even in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

(Pre-reading zone effect mode determination process of the effect control board)
A look-ahead zone effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S1303-14-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario, and in step S1303-14-2, a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table for determining a look-ahead zone effect scenario (see FIG. 41). ) Is selected, and the look-ahead zone effect scenario is determined by collating the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning designation command with the random number for determining the look-ahead zone effect scenario.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario means the effect contents of the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead zone effect. The contents of the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead zone effect include whether or not the fanning effect can be executed, the timing at which the fanning effect is executed when the fanning effect is executed, the type of the fanning effect to be executed, and the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. Whether or not, the timing when the look-ahead zone effect is executed when the look-ahead zone is executed is included.

The look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41 is associated with the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the processing at the time of winning the starting opening, and the current number of reserved first special figures (U1). Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the look-ahead zone effect determination table, the sub CPU 102a receives the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main start opening winning processing, and the sub RAM 102c, which is stored in the sub RAM 102c. 1 The number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the effect information reservation storage area (first storage unit to fourth storage unit), that is, the number of first special figure reservations (U1) is referred to.

Regarding the first special figure hold number (U1) of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41, the start opening winning process in step S1303 is executed before the hold information update process in step S1305. , The number of holdings that is one less than the actual number of holdings of the first special figure (U1) is defined.

Further, in each look-ahead zone effect scenario judgment table associated with the pre-judgment result and the first special figure reservation number (U1), the look-ahead zone effect scenario judgment value and the look-ahead zone effect scenario judgment value are displayed so as to be the selection rate (%) for each scenario. The look-ahead zone effect scenario is stored in association with it.

In addition, "the change", "1 before change", "2 before change" and "3 before change" described in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table are the look-ahead zone effect, the fanning success effect, the fanning failure effect 1 or It represents the timing at which the fanning failure effect 2 is executed. Here, the "variation" in the present embodiment represents a variation display of a special symbol corresponding to the start opening winning designation command related to the processing at the time of winning the starting opening (hereinafter, referred to as "the variation"), and "1 before the change". "Represents the fluctuation display of the special symbol immediately before the change is performed," 2 before the change "represents the fluctuation display of the special symbol two before the change is performed, and" 3 before the change "is , Represents the variation display of the special symbol three before the variation is made.

In step S1303-14-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final number of people in order to determine the final number of people (hereinafter, simply referred to as “final number of people”) related to the zone precursor effect icon, and steps S1303-14. In -4, the final number of people determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the final number of people is selected, and the final number of people and the final number of people are associated with each other by collating the look-ahead zone production scenario with the random number for determining the final number of people. Random number production scenario judgment TBL. Determine No.

The final number of people is the number of people who make up the icon used for the zone precursor effect, and is the number of people who will finally reach it. The reason why it is "final" is that the production mode of the zone precursor effect, in other words, the number of people who make up the icon used for the zone precursor effect (icon display mode) can change on the way. be. In the present embodiment, the final number of people is set to four types of 1, 3, 5, and 7, and this "1 person" corresponds to the second special aspect, and "3 people" corresponds to the second. 3 Corresponding to the special aspect 1, "5 persons" corresponds to the third special aspect 2, and "7 persons" corresponds to the third special aspect 3. That is, determining the final number of people can also be said to determine the final display mode of the icon for the zone precursor effect.

The final number determination table shown in FIG. 42 is associated with the look-ahead zone effect scenario determined in the read-ahead zone effect scenario determination. In each final number determination table associated with the look-ahead zone effect scenario, the final number determination value and the final number are stored in association with each other so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 42. Therefore, when selecting the final number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

Further, the "precursor effect scenario determination TBL.No" described in the final number determination table is the identification information of the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination described later, and is used in the processing at the time of winning the starting opening. The judgment result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario judgment and the judgment result of the final number of people judgment are associated with each other. Therefore, in the final number determination, the final number is determined, and the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination is determined.

In step S1303-14-5, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the zone precursor effect scenario in order to determine the zone precursor effect scenario, and in step S1303-14-6, the zone for determining the zone precursor effect scenario. Select the precursor effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 43), and select the precursor effect scenario determination TBL. The zone precursor effect scenario is determined by collating No with the random number for determining the zone precursor effect scenario.

The zone precursor effect scenario means the effect content of the zone precursor effect. The content of the zone precursor effect includes whether or not the zone precursor effect can be executed, and the icon display mode when the zone precursor effect is executed is either the second special aspect or the third special aspect 1 to the third special aspect 3. The timing of change, the icon display mode after the change (the number of people constituting the icon) when the change is made, and so on are included.

As described above, the zone precursor effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 43 is a precursor effect scenario determination TBL in which the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination in the processing at the time of winning the starting opening are associated with each other. Associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the zone precursor effect scenario determination table, the precursor effect scenario determination TBL. Refer to No.

"At the time of winning", "3 before change → 2 before change" and "2 before change → 1 before change" described in the zone precursor effect scenario judgment table are the timings that are the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect. Represents. Here, "at the time of winning" represents the time when the special figure hold corresponding to the start opening winning designation command related to the processing at the time of winning the main starting opening is generated, and "3 before change → 2 before change" means that the change is performed. Indicates the period from the end of the fluctuation display of the three previous special symbols to the start of the fluctuation display of the two previous special symbols (when the hold icon is shifted). It represents the period from the end of the variation display of the special symbol two before the change to the start of the variation display of the previous special symbol (when the hold icon is shifted).

In addition, in FIG. 43, "at the time of winning", "3 before change → 2 before change" and "2 before change → 1 before change" are provided as the timing of the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect. In this embodiment, the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes is "at the time of winning", "4 before change → 3 before change", and "3 before change → 2 before change". And "2 before change → 1 before change", and the zone precursor effect scenario determination table used when the zone precursor effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 43 is the first special figure hold number "3". Therefore, only "at the time of winning", "3 before change → 2 before change", and "2 before change → 1 before change" can occur.

In the zone precursor effect scenario determination table used when the number of 1st special figure reservations is "4", the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes is "at the time of winning" and "before 4 changes →". "Before 3 fluctuations", "Before 3 fluctuations → Before 2 fluctuations" and "Before 2 fluctuations → Before 1 fluctuation" are set, and in the precursor effect scenario judgment table used when the number of 1st special figure pending is "2", the zone As the timing when the number of people constituting the icon related to the precursor effect changes, "at the time of winning" and "2 before change → 1 before change" are set, and the precursor effect scenario used when the first special figure pending number "1" is set. In the determination table, "at the time of winning" is set as the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes.

Further, in FIG. 43, the numbers "1", "3", "5" and "7" described below the column of the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes are shown at that timing. It shows that the icon changes to a display mode composed of the number of people.

Therefore, for example, in the precursor effect scenario 17-1, the display mode of the hold icon generated at the time of winning and the icon displayed at that time is the display mode (second special mode) consisting of the number of people "1 person", and "3. In "Before change → 2 Before change", the display mode of the icon displayed at that time becomes the display mode consisting of "3 people" (3rd special mode 1), and in "2 Before change → 1 Before change", The display mode of the icon displayed at that time represents the production content of the zone precursor effect in which the display mode consists of the number of people "5 people" (third special mode 2).

In step S1303-14-7, the sub CPU 102a subsubscribes the look-ahead zone effect execution information indicating the look-ahead zone effect scenario which is the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination and the zone precursor effect scenario which is the determination result of the zone precursor effect scenario determination. The start port winning designation command of the RAM 102c is set (stored) in the continuous advance notice effect execution information area of the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the command.

In step S1303-14-8, the sub CPU 102a subsubscribes the look-ahead zone effect control command indicating the look-ahead zone effect scenario which is the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination and the zone precursor effect scenario which is the determination result of the zone precursor effect scenario determination. Set in the transmission buffer of RAM 102c.

The read-ahead zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the look-ahead zone effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the zone precursor effect according to the zone precursor effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect control command and the effect content (effect mode) indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario. And control (execute) the zone fanning effect and the look-ahead zone effect.

In step S1303-14-9, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the icon display mode scenario for determining the icon display mode scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect or the zone precursor effect.

In step S1303-14-10, the sub CPU 102a relates to whether or not the result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination is a look-ahead zone effect scenario including execution of the look-ahead zone effect, in other words, the start opening winning process. It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead zone effect based on the start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1303-14-11, and the read-ahead zone effect is not executed, but the zone fanning effect is executed (hereinafter, the read-ahead zone effect is not executed, but the zone fanning is performed). When it is determined that the execution of the effect is referred to as "gase zone fanning effect"), the process is transferred to step S1303-14-112.

In step S1303-14-11, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 44) for executing the look-ahead zone effect scenario for determining the icon display mode scenario when executing the look-ahead zone effect. Icon display mode scenario determination The icon display mode scenario determination is performed to determine the icon display mode scenario by collating the random numbers for determining the icon display mode.

The icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect shown in FIG. 44 is a precursor effect scenario in which the determination result of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number of people determination in the processing at the time of winning the starting opening are associated with each other. It is provided for each. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect, the sub CPU 102a refers to the precursor effect scenario indicated by the precursor effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

A plurality of icon display mode scenarios are provided in each icon display mode scenario determination table provided for each precursor effect scenario, and icon display mode scenario judgment values are appropriately assigned to each icon display mode scenario. ing.

In addition, "at the time of winning", "2 before change", "1 before change", and "the change" described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the look-ahead zone effect indicate the timing at which the icon display mode changes. Represents. As described above, when the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the display mode of the displayed zone effect target icon is the third special mode 3, and the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon is the third special mode 6. ..

Further, even if the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, before the look-ahead zone effect is executed, the zone effect target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 1 and 2 as the zone precursor effect, and the zone effect. The non-target icon becomes the second special aspect or the third special aspect 4, 5. Then, when the icon of the second special mode or the third special mode including the silhouette of the person is displayed in this way, the silhouette of the person constituting the icon (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode) The color can change.

For example, the “white → green” of “1 before change” of the icon display mode scenario “5” in FIG. 44 is the silhouette of the person constituting the icon displayed in white (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode). It shows that the color of is changed to green.

Further, the "white-> green-> red-> zebra-> rainbow" of the "correspondence" of the icon display mode scenario "15" in FIG. 44 is the silhouette of the person constituting the icon displayed in white (about the third special mode). Indicates that the color of the main silhouette part) changes gradually in the order of green → red → zebra pattern → rainbow color.

It should be noted that the color change of the silhouette of the person constituting the icon (the main silhouette portion in the third special aspect) is appropriately performed according to the effect content of the variable effect being performed at that time. The content of the variable effect for changing the color of the human silhouette is temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, or one or more times during one variable effect depending on the expectation of winning the jackpot. A predetermined cut-in for displaying a cut-in image according to the expectation of winning a big hit on the image display device 14 at the time of step-up of a so-called step-up notice for stepping up a predetermined effect (effect image, effect sound, etc.) in stages. Notice, a line notice that outputs the line sound from the voice output device 15 while displaying the line image according to the expectation of the jackpot winning on the image display device 14, the appearance of the character, or the execution of the development effect that develops into a super reach effect. At that time, when the reach state is established, a predetermined operation effect by the effect accessory device 17, etc. is set appropriately according to the variable effect at that time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the color of the silhouette of the person constituting the icon related to the icon display mode scenario for executing the look-ahead zone effect (main silhouette portion in the third special mode) changes is determined by the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to the above, and can be appropriately set when the icon shifts when the predetermined variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is started.

In step S1303-14-12, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (not shown) for executing the Gase zone fanning effect scenario for determining the icon display mode scenario when executing the Gase zone fanning effect, and displays the icon. The icon display mode scenario determination is performed to determine the icon display mode scenario by collating the display mode scenario determination random numbers.

The sub CPU 102a stores the icon display mode scenario determined in step S1303-14-11 or step S1303-14-12 in the icon display mode scenario area of the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. And ends the pre-reading zone effect mode determination process.

(Continuous step-up notice of effect control board Production mode determination process)
A continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a).

In step S1303-15-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the continuous step-up advance notice effect scenario, and in step S1303-15-2, obtains a continuous step-up advance notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 46 (a)). The pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command and the number of special figure reservations (first special figure reservation number or second special figure reservation number) corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified are continuous. Step-up notice effect scenario The continuous step-up notice effect scenario is determined by collating random numbers for determination. The continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (a).

The continuous step-up notice effect scenario means the effect content (effect mode) of the continuous step-up notice effect, and the timing at which various step effects constituting each stage of the continuous step-up notice effect are executed, and the step effect to be executed. Indicates the type of.

In step S1303-15-3, the sub CPU 102a continuously notices execution of the continuous step-up notice effect execution information indicating the continuous step-up notice effect scenario in the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (store) in the information storage area.

In steps S1303-15-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a continuous step-up notice effect control command indicating a continuous step-up notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process.

The continuous step-up notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the continuous step-up notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 continuously follow the effect contents (effect mode) according to the continuous step-up notice effect scenario indicated by the continuous step-up notice effect control command. Control (execute) the step-up notice effect.

(Continuous step-up notice production scenario judgment table)
FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table.

In the continuous step-up notice effect scenario judgment table shown in FIG. 46 (a), the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the number of special figures reserved corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be notified, and the continuous number The selection rate (%) based on the random number for determining the step-up advance notice effect scenario, the selected continuous step-up advance notice effect scenario No., and the effect content (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored. There is.

In addition, the "blue fan (SU1)" in the column of the effect content (effect mode) is the first step in which the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is located in front of the image display device 14 as the first step effect. A plurality of LEDs provided inside emit blue light while performing an effect operation of moving to the effect position (movement width: small), and a blue effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14. Means that.

Further, "green fanning (SU2)" means that as a second step effect, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the second effect position (movement width: medium) located in front of the image display device 14. This means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit green light while performing the effect operation, and a green effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

Further, "red fanning (SU3)" means that as a third step effect, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the third effect position (movement width: large) located in front of the image display device 14. This means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit red light while performing the effect operation, and a red effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

Further, "rainbow fanning (SU4)" means that as the final fourth step effect, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is located in front of the image display device 14 to the third effect position (movement width: large). This means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit light in rainbow colors while performing a moving effect operation, and a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

In addition, the jackpot expectation of each step production is "blue fan (SU1)" <"green fan (SU2)" <"red fan (SU3)" <"rainbow fan (SU4)", and continuous step-up. In the advance notice production, it is confirmed that the variable production more than the SP reach production will be executed at the stage of stepping up (progressing) to "Red fanning (SU3)", and the variable production at the stage of stepping up to "Rainbow fanning (SU4)". It is confirmed that the result of is a big hit. However, "Rainbow Fan (SU4)" appears only in the fluctuation in order to maintain the expectation of the player.

(Chance eye notice of production control board Production mode determination processing)
FIG. 45B will be described with reference to the chance eye advance notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102.

In step S1303-16-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the chance eye advance notice effect scenario, and in step S1303-16-2, selects the chance eye advance notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 46B). , The pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command, the number of special figure reservations (the number of 1st special figure hold or the 2nd special figure hold number) corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified, and the chance eye notice. The chance eye notice production scenario is determined by collating random numbers for determining the production scenario. The chance eye notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 (b).

The chance eye notice effect scenario means the effect content (effect mode) of the chance eye notice effect, and indicates the timing at which the various chance eyes constituting the chance eye notice effect are stopped and displayed, and the type of the chance eye that is stopped and displayed. It is a thing.

In step S1303-16-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the chance eye notice effect execution information indicating the chance eye notice effect effect scenario in the continuous advance notice execution information storage unit of the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (store) in the area.

In step S1303-16-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the chance eye notice effect control command indicating the chance eye notice effect effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the present chance eye notice effect mode determination process.

The chance eye advance notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the chance eye notice effect control command, the chance eye notice effect effect is produced according to the effect content (effect mode) according to the chance eye notice effect effect scenario indicated by the chance eye notice effect control command. To control (execute).

(Chance eye notice production scenario judgment table)
FIG. 46B is a diagram showing a chance eye notice effect scenario determination table.

In the chance eye notice effect scenario judgment table shown in FIG. 46 (b), the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be notified, and the chance eye are displayed. The selection rate (%) based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect scenario, the chance eye advance notice effect scenario No. to be selected, and the effect content (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely stored in association with each other.

In addition, the "blue symbol" in the column of the effect content (effect mode) means that the combination of the effect symbols whose color is set to blue is stopped and displayed as a chance eye. The "green symbol" means that the combination of the effect symbols whose color is set to green is stopped and displayed as a chance eye. The "red symbol" means that the combination of the effect symbols whose color is set to red is stopped and displayed as a chance eye.

In addition, the jackpot expectation of each chance eye is "blue symbol" <"green symbol" <"red symbol", and when "red symbol" is stopped and displayed in the chance eye notice production, it is more than SP reach production. It is confirmed that the fluctuation effect of is executed. In addition, although there is no chance eye for the jackpot to be confirmed in the chance eye notice production, a chance eye for the jackpot to be confirmed may be provided.

(Processing for determining the mode of the production control board)
FIG. 47 (a) will be used to explain the process of determining the serif notice effect mode of the effect control board 102.

In step S1303-17-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the dialogue advance notice effect scenario, and in step S1303-17-2, selects and starts the dialogue advance notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 48 (a)). Preliminary judgment result specified by the mouth prize designation command, the number of special figure reservations (the number of 1st special figure hold or the 2nd special figure hold number) corresponding to the type of special symbol to be announced, and the dialogue advance notice production scenario judgment The dialogue notice production scenario is determined by collating the random numbers for use. The dialogue notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 (a).

The dialogue notice effect scenario means the effect content (effect mode) of the dialogue notice effect, and indicates the timing at which various dialogue effects constituting the dialogue notice effect are executed and the type of the dialogue effect to be executed.

In step S1303-17-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the dialogue advance notice effect execution information indicating the dialogue advance notice effect scenario in the continuous advance notice execution information storage area of the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (remember).

In step S1303-17-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the dialogue advance notice effect control command indicating the dialogue advance notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the dialogue advance notice effect mode determination process.

The dialogue advance notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the dialogue advance notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls (executes) the dialogue advance notice effect according to the effect content (effect mode) indicated by the dialogue advance notice effect scenario indicated by the dialogue advance notice effect control command. do.

(Serif notice production scenario judgment table)
FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a dialogue notice effect scenario determination table.

In the dialogue advance notice production scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 (a), the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the number of special figures reserved corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be notified, and the dialogue advance notice effect The selection rate (%) based on the scenario determination random number, the selected dialogue advance notice effect scenario No., and the effect content (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

In addition, "Maybe", "That?", "Ne ~ ne ~", "What is this ?!" and "No!" ) Is displayed in black on the image display device 14.

Further, "reach?" Means a line displayed in black on the image display device 14 to suggest that the SP reach effect or more may be executed. “Reach!” Means a line displayed in black on the image display device 14 to indicate the execution of the reach effect.

Further, "hot!" Means a line displayed in red on the image display device 14 to suggest that the expectation of a big hit is high. "Intense heat!" Means the lines displayed in gold on the image display device 14 to suggest that the expectation of the jackpot is quite high. “Confirmed!” Means a line displayed in rainbow characters on the image display device 14 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, the jackpot expectation of each line is "black line" <"deficit line" <"gold line" <"rainbow line", and "deficit line" and "gold line" are displayed in the line notice production. At that time, it is confirmed that the variable effect equal to or higher than the SP reach effect is executed, and when the "rainbow character" line is displayed, the result of the variable effect is confirmed to be a big hit. However, "deficit dialogue", "gold dialogue", and "rainbow dialogue" are displayed only in the fluctuation in order to maintain the expectation of the player.

(Effect notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board)
The effect advance notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b).

In step S1303-18-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the effect advance notice effect scenario, and in step S1303-18-2, the effect advance notice effect scenario determination table for determining the effect advance notice effect scenario (FIG. 48 (FIG. 48). b) Select) and select the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command and the number of special figures held (1st special figure hold or 2nd special figure hold) corresponding to the type of special symbol to be announced. The effect notice effect scenario is determined by collating the number) with the random number for determining the effect notice effect scenario. The effect notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 (b).

The effect notice effect scenario means the effect content (effect mode) of the effect notice effect, and indicates the timing at which the variation start effect image of the effect symbol constituting the effect notice effect is displayed, and the type of the effect image.

In step S1303-18-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the effect advance notice effect execution information indicating the effect advance notice effect scenario in the continuous advance notice execution information storage area of the same storage unit as the storage unit that stores the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (remember).

In step S1303-18-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect advance notice effect control command indicating the effect advance notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the effect advance notice effect mode determination process.

The effect advance notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 control (execute) the effect notice effect according to the effect content (effect mode) according to the effect notice effect scenario indicated by the effect notice effect control command. )do.

(Effect notice production scenario judgment table)
FIG. 48B is a diagram showing an effect notice effect scenario determination table.

In the effect notice effect scenario judgment table shown in FIG. 48 (b), the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be notified, and the effect notice effect effect The selection rate (%) based on the scenario determination random number, the selected effect notice effect scenario No., and the effect content (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

The "blue effect" in the column of the effect content (effect mode) means that the blue effect image is displayed so as to surround the effect symbol at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14. means. Further, the “green effect” means that a green effect image is displayed so as to surround the surrounding of the effect symbol at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14.

Further, the “red effect” means that the red effect image is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the effect symbol at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14. Further, the “rainbow effect” means that a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed so as to surround the surrounding of the effect symbol at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14.

The jackpot expectation of each effect image is "blue effect" <"green effect" <"red effect" <"rainbow effect", and SP reach when the "red effect" occurs in the effect preview production. The execution of the variable effect beyond the effect is confirmed, and when the "rainbow effect" occurs, the jackpot of the variable effect is confirmed. However, the "rainbow effect" occurs only in the fluctuation in order to maintain the player's expectation.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous notice effect occurs, the reach effect or more is determined by the fluctuation, but when the continuous notice effect is executed with the variation display a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the present embodiment is concerned. Depending on the fluctuation, the reach effect or higher may be confirmed or the SP reach effect or higher may be confirmed. In addition, the continuous advance notice effect is executed only in the situation where it is confirmed that the variable effect is executed a plurality of times, but the continuous advance notice effect is executed even in the situation where only one variable effect (the variation) is executed. It may be done.

(Icon change notice judgment processing of the production control board)
The icon change notice determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

In step S1303-19.1, the sub CPU 102a is currently in the icon change notice prohibition period, specifically, during the jackpot game, during the SP / SPSP reach production, and a predetermined time (for example) after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The period until the elapse of 3 seconds), the period before the stop display of the special symbol is performed (for example, 10 seconds), or the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has already been or has already been executed. Determine if it is planned to do. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the icon change notice period is reached, the process shifts to step S1303-19-5, and when it determines that the icon change notice period is not reached, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19-2.

In step S1303-19-2, the sub CPU 102a acquires an icon change notice execution determination random number, and in step S1303-19-3, determines whether or not the icon change notice is executed and the type of icon change notice to be executed. By selecting the icon change notice judgment table (see FIG. 50) and collating the effect mode, the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command, and the random number for the icon change notice execution judgment, the icon change notice is related. Performs a judgment Icon change notice Judgment processing is performed. The details of the icon change notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

In step S1303-19-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is non-execution of the icon change notice. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the icon change notice is not non-executed, the process shifts to step SS1303-19-5, and when it determines that the icon change notice is not non-executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19-6.

In step S1303-19-5, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display mode scenario for displaying the icon in the normal mode until the variation effect is completed, and the sub CPU 102a determines the icon display mode scenario for no notice of icon change, and steps S1303-19-22. Move the process to.

In step S1303-19-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is the execution of the normal change notice without the change effect (action effect) by the predetermined character. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the normal change notice is executed, the process shifts to step S1303-19-7, and when it determines that the normal change notice is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19-10.

In step S1303-19-7, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final display mode of the icon for normal change notice, and in step S1303-19-8, the normal change notice is given according to the current gaming state (effect mode). Icon for final display mode (see FIG. 51 or 52) is selected, the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command, and the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the type of special symbol to be announced (see FIG. 51 or 52). By collating the first special figure hold number or the second special figure hold number) with a random number for determining the icon final display mode, the icon final display mode, which is the final display mode of the icon, and the normal change notice described later. Icon display mode Scenario judgment TBL. Icon display mode used when selecting a scenario judgment table. Determine No. The icon final display mode determination table for normal change notice will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

In step S1303-19-9, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 53) for normal change notice, and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. By collating No and the like, the icon display mode scenario for normal change notice is determined, and the process is moved to steps S1303-19-22. The icon display mode scenario determination table for normal change notice will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

In step S1303-19-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is the execution of the throwing kiss notice. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is being executed, the process shifts to step S1303-19-11, and when it determines that the throwing kiss notice is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19-14.

The throwing kiss notice is composed of a hold icon change notice and / or a changing icon change notice, and the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss (the action of flying a heart) by the throwing kiss character, and the jackpot corresponding to the icon is changed. It is a notice effect of whether or not to improve the jackpot winning expectation of the judgment (special symbol lottery) (so-called whether or not the chance is increased), and is a kind of pre-reading notice effect performed based on the preliminary judgment result. In the throwing kiss notice, since the action effect (change effect) acting on the icon is performed by the throwing kiss character, it can be said that the effect period (time) is longer than the normal change notice.

In step S1303-19-11, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final display mode of the icon for throwing kiss notice, and in step S1303-19-12, throwing kiss notice according to the current gaming state (effect mode). Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 51), the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the number of 1st special figure reservations corresponding to the 1st special symbol, and the icon final display mode. Icon display mode used when selecting the icon final display mode, which is the final display mode of the icon, and the icon display mode for throwing kiss notice, which will be described later, by collating the judgment random numbers, etc. Scenario judgment TBL. Determine No. The icon final display mode determination table for the throwing kiss notice will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

In step S1303-19-13, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 54) for the throwing kiss notice, and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. By collating No and the like, the icon display mode scenario for the throwing kiss notice is determined, and the process is moved to steps S1303-19-22. The icon display mode scenario determination table for the throwing kiss notice will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

In step S1303-19-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is the execution of the handshake event notice. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the handshake event notice is being executed, the process shifts to step S1303-19-15, and when it is determined that the handshake event notice is not executed, the icon change notice determination process ends.

The handshake event notice is composed of a hold icon change notice and a changing icon change notice, and a handshake event that appears near the handshake event main character and the changing icon display area 142, which is the icon to be noticed displayed in the fourth special aspect 1. When a predetermined line appears while shaking hands with the party character, the display mode (color) of the main character of the handshake event is gradually changed, and the jackpot judgment (special symbol lottery) corresponding to the icon is expected to win the jackpot. It is a notice effect of whether or not to improve the degree (so-called whether or not to increase the chance), and is a kind of pre-reading advance notice effect performed based on the pre-judgment result. In the handshake event notice, the action effect (change effect) that acts on the handshake event hero (changing icon) is performed by the handshake event character, so it can be said that the effect period (time) is longer than the normal change notice.

It should be noted that the appearance of a predetermined line in the handshake event notice does not mean that the display mode (color) of the handshake event hero will change, but the display mode (color) of the handshake event hero will change completely. The change of the display mode (color) may be successful, or the change of the display mode (color) may be returned to the original display mode and the change of the display mode may fail in the middle of the change.

In addition, the number of times a line appears in one handshake event notice (hereinafter referred to as "the number of lines") is set. In the present embodiment, the number of dialogues is set to 4 types of 1 to 4 times.

In addition, a handshake event notice suggestion effect is provided in connection with the handshake event notice. The handshake event notice suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the handshake event notice will be executed. In the handshake event notice suggestion production, from the time it is decided to execute the handshake event notice until the handshake event notice starts, the handshake event notice target hold icon is set to the 4th special for the execution of the handshake event notice. It is executed by displaying in the second aspect, displaying the handshake event notice non-target changing icon in the fourth special aspect 3, and displaying the handshake event notice non-target holding icon in the fourth special aspect 4.

In step S1303-19-15, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final display mode of the icon for handshake event notice, and in step S1303-19-16, the icon final display mode determination table for handshake event notice (FIG. 55). Refer to), and by collating the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command with the number of 1st special figure pending corresponding to the 1st special symbol, the random number for determining the final display mode of the icon, etc. The final display mode of the icon, which is the final display mode, and the final color pattern described later are determined. The icon final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

In step S1303-19-17, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the number of dialogues, and in step S1303-19-18, selects a dialogue number determination table (see FIG. 56) for determining the number of dialogues, and finally. The number of lines for the handshake event notice is determined by collating the color pattern with the random number for determining the number of lines. The dialogue count determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

In step S1303-19-19, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table (see FIG. 57) for handshake event notice, and collates the final color pattern with the number of lines for handshake event notice. Icon display mode Scenario determination table No. is determined. The icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for the handshake event notice will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

In step S1303-19-20, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice, and in step S1303-19-21, the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice (FIG. 58). (See) is selected, and the icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice is determined by collating the random number for determining the icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice. The icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

In step S1303-19-22, the sub CPU 102a has an icon display mode scenario determined by the processes of steps S1303-19-5, step S1303-19-9, step S1303-19-13, step S1303-19-21, and the like. Is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the sub RAM 102c, and the icon change notice determination process is terminated.

◆ (Icon change notice judgment table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an icon change notice determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the icon change notice and the type of icon change notice to be executed.

In the icon change notice judgment table shown in FIG. 50, the effect mode (game state), the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) by the random number for the icon change notice execution judgment are selected. The type of icon change notice to be displayed is uniquely associated and stored.

As the first feature of the icon change notice determination table shown in FIG. 50, in the normal game state (effect mode A), a normal change notice (normal hold change effect) without an action effect (change effect) and a throw with an action effect are provided. While three types of kiss notice and handshake event notice (special hold change production) are set to be executed, in the high accuracy / low accuracy short game state (effect modes B and C), the throwing kiss notice and the handshake are shaken. One point is that it is set so that only the normal change notice is executed without executing the meeting notice. By doing so, the effect of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice cannot be sufficiently secured in the high accuracy / low accuracy short game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than that in the normal game state, and the effect is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice is executed at a rate lower than the execution rate in the normal game state (effect mode A) in the high accuracy / low accuracy short game state (effect modes B and C). May be good. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice may be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate in the normal game state only in one of the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, when at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice is executed in at least one of the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state, the fluctuation time tends to be long because there is no waiting fluctuation display. It may be executed for the changing icon only during the change display (variation effect) of the second special symbol which is executed when the number of special figures reserved is "0". In this way, it is possible to secure the production time of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy short-time gaming state.

In addition, when at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice is executed in the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state, the execution ratios differ between the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state ( For example, high accuracy time reduction> low accuracy time reduction, high accuracy time reduction <low accuracy time reduction) may be set. In this way, the player is less likely to get bored because the execution mode of the icon change notice for each game state is different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a throwing kiss notice or a handshake event notice (special hold change effect) is executed in a high-accuracy time-shortened game state or a low-accuracy time-shortened game state, an effect mode (effect time is short or appears) different from the normal game state. It may be executed with different characters and their actions, etc.), or in a high-accuracy time-short game state or a low-accuracy time-short game state, a different type of special hold change effect (the effect time is short, or the effect time is different) from the normal game state. (The characters that appear and their actions are different, etc.) may be executed. Further, different types of special hold change effects may be executed in the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state.

The second feature of the icon change notice determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the game state (effect mode B, C) is higher / lower accuracy than the ratio at which the normal change notice is executed in the normal game state (effect mode A). The point is that the rate at which the change notice is usually executed is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short-game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal game state (reach effect is unlikely to occur).

In addition, the ratio of the normal change notice being executed between the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state may be different while being higher than the normal game state, and even in this case, the same effect as described above may be obtained. It becomes possible to play.

In addition, although the execution rate of the normal change notice, the throwing kiss notice, and the handshake event notice in the normal game state is the same, the execution rate of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice is higher than the execution rate of the normal change notice. It may be set to, or the execution rate of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake event notice may be different. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the normal game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be longer than in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-short game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the icon change notice (throwing kiss notice, handshake event notice) accompanied by the action effect (change effect), the action effect (change effect) is performed during one variation display, but a plurality of variations The action effect may be performed across the displays, or both the icon change notice that performs the action effect during one variation display and the icon change notice that performs the action effect across a plurality of variation displays are executed. You may.

In that case, with respect to the icon change notice in which the action effect (change effect) is executed during the variation display of 1, it is preferable to set the execution ratio in the high accuracy / low accuracy time-shortening game state to be lower than that in the normal game state. Further, regarding the icon change notice that executes the change effect over a plurality of variable displays, the execution ratio may be the same in the normal game state and the high accuracy / low accuracy time saving game state, or the high accuracy / low accuracy time saving game. The execution rate in the normal gaming state may be higher than that in the normal gaming state, or the execution rate in the high-accuracy / low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state may be higher than in the normal gaming state.

(Icon final display mode judgment table for normal change notice during normal game state)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for notifying a normal change during a normal game state. Note that FIG. 51 also serves as an icon final display mode determination table for notifying a throwing kiss.

In the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change notice during the normal game state shown in FIG. The selection rate (%) by the random number for determining the final display mode of the icon, the type (7 types) of the selected icon final display mode for normal change, and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No is uniquely associated with and stored.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a determines the final display mode determination of the icon for normal change notice, the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main starting opening winning processing, stored in the sub RAM 102c. And the number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c will be referred to.

(Icon final display mode judgment table for normal change notice during time-saving game state)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for normal change notice during the (high accuracy / low accuracy) time-saving game state.

In the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change notice during the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 52, the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the current second special figure hold number, and the normal change The selection rate (%) by the random number for determining the final display mode of the icon, the type of the icon final display mode for normal change to be selected (5 types less than those in the normal game state), and the icon display mode scenario judgment TBL. No is uniquely associated with and stored.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a determines the final display mode determination of the icon for normal change notice, the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command, which is the target of the main starting opening winning processing, stored in the sub RAM 102c. And the number of the second start opening winning designation commands stored in the second effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c will be referred to.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table during the normal game state shown in FIG. 51 is that the icon is more than the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change during the time-saving game state shown in FIG. The point is that there are many types of final display modes. By doing so, the player is less likely to get tired of the normal change notice in the normal game state in which the stay period tends to be longer than that in the short-time game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change advance notice during the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 52 is that the icon for the normal change during the normal game state shown in FIG. 51 is more iconic than the final display mode determination table. Although the number of types of final display modes has decreased, there is a point that the display mode is such that the preliminary determination result is more specifically notified to the player (the player can easily grasp the notification content immediately). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the notice content of the normal change notice in the time-saving game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than that in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the second special mode 22 (extreme heat) is selected as the final icon display mode, the reach effect by a specific effect symbol (for example, "7") is generated in the target variable effect. You may. In this way, the player's expectation for the type of final display mode of the icon can be effectively increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for normal change notice during normal game state)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for notifying a normal change during a normal game state.

In the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change notice during the normal game state shown in FIG. 53, the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No, the selected icon display mode scenario for normal change notice, the effect content of the icon display mode scenario for normal change notice are uniquely associated, and as remarks, the icon final display mode and the first start opening prize designation command are used. The specified pre-judgment result is stored.

Icon display mode for normal change notice In the column of the production content of the scenario, "at the time of winning", "2 before change → 1 before change", "1 before change", "1 before change → the change" and "the change" , Indicates the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

For example, in the icon display mode scenario "70" for normal change notice, the hold icon of the second special mode is displayed at the time of winning, and one before the change display of the special symbol two before the change is completed. When the variable display of the special symbol is started, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 11, and in the variable display of the previous special symbol, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the second by the throwing kiss notice. This is an effect content in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 13 when the change is changed to the special mode 12 and the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol is completed.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for throwing kiss notice during normal game state)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for notifying a throwing kiss during a normal game state.

In the scenario determination table for the icon display mode for the throwing kiss notice during the normal game state shown in FIG. 54, the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No, the icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice and the icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice selected with a predetermined selection rate are uniquely associated with each other, and as remarks, the icon final display mode and the first start The pre-judgment result specified by the mouth prize designation command is stored.

Icon display mode for throwing kiss notice In the column of the production content of the scenario, "at the time of winning", "2 before change → 1 before change", "1 before change", "1 before change → the change" and "the change" , Indicates the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

Further, "successful throwing kiss notice" indicates that the throwing kiss notice described later is performed and the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. Further, "Throwing kiss notice failure 1" indicates that the throwing kiss notice described later is performed, but the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon does not change. Further, "Throwing kiss notice failure 2" indicates that the throwing kiss notice, which will be described later, is about to be performed, but the throwing kiss notice is not executed.

Further, in the parentheses following the "successful throwing kiss notice", the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon that changes depending on the throwing kiss notice is shown.

For example, in the icon display mode scenario "73" for the throwing kiss notice, the hold icon in the normal mode is displayed at the time of winning, and in the change display of the special symbol immediately before the change, the hold icon is displayed in the throw kiss notice. Attempts to change to the second special aspect 11, but the change ends in failure and remains in the normal mode, and is held when the change is started after the change display of the previous special symbol is completed. The display mode of the icon is changed to the second special mode 12, and in the change, the display mode of the changing icon is changed to the second special mode 13 by the notice of the throwing kiss.

(Icon final display mode judgment table for handshake event notice)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for handshake event notice.

In the final display mode determination table of the icon for handshake event notice shown in FIG. 55, the pre-judgment result specified by the first start opening winning designation command, the number of reserved first special figures, and the final display of the icon for handshake event notice are displayed. The selection rate (%) based on the mode determination random number, the selected icon final display mode, and the final color pattern corresponding to the icon final display mode are uniquely associated and stored.

The final color pattern is used when selecting the dialogue count determination table used in the dialogue count determination described above, and is the pre-judgment result indicated by the start opening winning designation command related to the main start opening winning process, the first special figure pending number. And the identification information associated with the icon final display mode.

(Table for determining the number of dialogues for handshake event notice)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a dialogue count determination table for handshake event notice.

In the dialogue count determination table for handshake event notice shown in FIG. 56, the final color pattern, the selection rate (%) based on the dialogue frequency determination random number, and the selected dialogue count are uniquely associated with each other as a remark. The pre-judgment result specified by the first start opening winning designation command and the color of the icon are stored.

The number of lines is set to 1 to 4, and the rate at which the icon changes increases as the number of lines increases, so the expectation of a jackpot according to the number of lines is 1 line <2 lines < Line 3 times <line 4 times.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment TBL decision table for handshake event notice)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake event notice.

In the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for the handshake event notice shown in FIG. 57, the final color pattern, the number of dialogues, and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL for the handshake event notice to be selected are displayed. No is uniquely associated with and stored.

Icon display mode for handshake event notice Scenario judgment TBL. No is the identification information for selecting the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for the handshake event notice used in the handshake event notice icon display mode scenario determination.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for handshake event notice)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake event notice.

In the icon display mode scenario determination table for the handshake event notice shown in FIG. 58, the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No, the icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice, which is selected by the random number for determining the scenario of the handshake event notice, and the effect content of the icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice are uniquely associated with each other. As a remark, the number of lines, the final display mode of the icon, and the pre-judgment result specified by the first start opening winning designation command are stored.

Icon display mode for handshake event notice "At the time of winning", "1 change before → the change", "the (line) first time", "the (line) second time", "the relevant" The "(line) 3rd time" and "the (line) 4th time" indicate the timing when the icon display mode changes due to the handshake event notice.

As described above, the number of lines that can appear from a predetermined character in one handshake event notice is 1 to 4, and "the (line) first time" indicates the appearance of the first line in the handshake event notice. "The (line) second time" represents the appearance of the second line in the handshake event notice, and "the (line) third time" represents the appearance of the third line in the handshake event notice. (Line) 4th time "represents the appearance of the 4th line in the handshake event notice.

"White" for "at the time of winning" indicates that when the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed at the time of winning, it is suddenly displayed in the white fourth special aspect 21. On the other hand, in the case of "white" for "1 before change → relevant change", the handshake event notice target hold icon displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, and the handshake event notice target is changing. When it becomes an icon, it indicates that the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice is displayed in the white fourth special aspect 11.

In addition, "~ fanning success" means that the change to the color corresponding to "~" of the "~ fanning success" is successful, and "~ fanning failure" means "~ fanning success" of the "~ fanning success". It means that the change to the color that corresponds to "" fails, specifically, it tries to change to the color that applies to "~", but returns to the color before the change in the middle of the change. In the present embodiment, the color change is performed from the lower end to the upper end of the handshake event notice hero.

For example, in the handshake event notice display mode scenario "120", the handshake event notice target hold icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed. When it is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice, it becomes the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice of the fourth special aspect 11 (the main character of the handshake event is white), and in the handshake event notice, With the appearance of the first dialogue, the color of the handshake event hero changed to green after the handshake event hero's color changed to green after the handshake event hero's color changed to green. With the appearance of the second dialogue, the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red after the production was performed to see if the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red. In addition, the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to the zebra pattern after the production of whether or not the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to the zebra pattern was performed, and with the appearance of the fourth dialogue, the main character of the handshake event It shows the content of the handshake event where the color of the main character of the handshake event changes to rainbow after the production of whether or not the color changes to rainbow is performed.

Further, in the handshake event notice display mode scenario "122", the handshake event notice target hold icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake event notice target hold icon is displayed. When it is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice, it becomes the changing icon subject to the handshake event notice in the fourth special aspect 12 (the main character of the handshake event is green), and in the handshake event notice, With the appearance of the first dialogue, the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red after a fanning effect was performed to see if the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to red. In addition, the color of the main character of the handshake event returned to red without changing to the zebra pattern after the production was performed to see if the color of the main character of the handshake event changed to the zebra pattern. , The color of the handshake event hero changed to red without changing to the zebra pattern after the production was performed to see if the color of the handshake event hero changed to the zebra pattern. It shows the content of the production in which the color of the main character of the handshake event changes to rainbow color after the production of fanning whether or not it changes to rainbow color is performed.

(Holding information update processing of production control board)
The hold information update process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current number of special figure reservations stored in the effect information reservation storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1305-2, the first special symbol corresponds to the special symbol storage designation command. The figure hold number (U1) or the second special figure hold number (U2) is updated.

In step S1305-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (U1, U2) has decreased before and after the update, and if it is determined that the number of special figure reservations has decreased, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1305-4. When the process is transferred and it is determined that the number of reserved special figures has not decreased, the process is transferred to step S1305-8 assuming that the number of reserved special figures has increased.

The sub CPU 102a shifts various effect information stored in each storage unit of the effect information hold storage area corresponding to the type of the reduced number of special figure reservations (starting port) in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. ..

Specifically, the effect information (data) stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit. For example, various effect information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information reservation storage area. Further, the effect information stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area is stored in the effect information common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area (0th storage area). Shift to part). As a result, the effect information stored in the storage area is deleted.

In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a sends a hold icon shift control command (first hold display shift control command or second hold display shift control command) indicating the type of the reduced special figure hold number (starting port) to the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer.

The hold icon shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon shift control command, the image control board 105 performs a shift process of shifting the hold icon related to the start port indicated by the received hold icon shift control command toward the changing icon display area 142.

In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the hold icon (execution of the variable effect) to be performed with the icon that has already been displayed. ), It is determined whether or not there is an icon that changes the display mode (executes the hold icon change notice), and if it is determined that there is an icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step S1305-7. If it is determined that there is no icon for changing the display mode, the pending information update process is terminated.

In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a sets an icon change control command indicating the change content according to the icon display mode scenario related to the icon for changing the display mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Here, the "content of change according to the icon display mode scenario" includes an icon for which the display mode is changed and a display mode to be changed.

The icon change control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the icon shift control command, it shifts the hold icon related to the hold icon shift process and changes the icon display mode according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received icon change control command.

In step S1305-8, the sub CPU 102a adds a hold icon based on the increase in the special figure hold number, and sends a hold icon addition control command indicating the type of the increased special figure hold number (starting port) to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set and end this hold information update process.

The hold icon addition control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon addition control command, the image control board 105 additionally displays the hold icon corresponding to the start port indicated by the received hold icon addition control command.

Since the icon effect control command indicating the icon display mode scenario is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by executing the process of step S1303-20 described above, the icon changes in the hold information update process. The icon change notice may be executed by the image control board 105 without sending a control command.

(Production mode setting process of the production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

In step S1308-1, the sub CPU 102a selects an effect mode determination table (see FIG. 65) for setting the effect mode, and in step S1308-2, the game state, the number of remaining time reductions, and the high value stored in the sub RAM 102c. Check the number of remaining probabilities.

The effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 65 is a table for determining the effect mode, and includes a gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state, non-time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state), time saving remaining number, and high probability. The remaining number of times, the effect mode, and the effect mode flag are associated.

The sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode by collating the game state, the number of remaining time reductions, and the number of remaining high probabilities with the selected effect mode setting table in step S1308-3, and sets the effect mode determined in step S1308-4. The corresponding effect mode flags "00H" to "04H" are set (stored) in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process is completed.

(Production design stop display pattern determination process on the production control board)
Next, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received effect symbol designation command in step S1310-1 and determines whether or not the special figure lottery (big hit determination) result is lost in step S1310-2. The sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310-3 when it determines that the special figure lottery (big hit determination) result is lost, and shifts the process to step S1310-15 when it determines that the special figure lottery (big hit determination) result is not lost. ..

In step S1310-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the chance eye notice effect scenario with reference to the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c or the effect information hold storage area, and in step S1310-4, the sub CPU 102a has a chance in the variable effect to be started from now on. It is determined whether or not to execute the eye notice effect. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the chance eye notice effect is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1310-5, and when it determines that the chance eye notice effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310-9.

In step S1310-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 67 (a)) for the chance eye notice effect, and in step S1310-6, the effect symbol stop display for the chance eye notice effect. Determine the pattern.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the chance eye notice shows the type of the current chance eye defined by the chance eye notice effect scenario, the effect symbol stop display pattern, and each effect. The selection rate (%) of the symbol stop display pattern is uniquely associated and stored.

For example, if the type of the chance eye this time is a blue pattern, a combination of a plurality of types of effect symbols whose color is set to blue as the effect symbol stop display pattern ("2", "4", "6", or "6" " Any one of "4" and "2") will be determined by a predetermined selectivity.

In step S1310-7, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1310-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect symbol stop display control command for the chance eye advance notice effect corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. To finish.

In step S1310-9, the sub CPU 102a confirms the look-ahead zone effect scenario with reference to the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c or the effect information hold storage area, and in step S1310-10, zone fanning in the variable effect to be started from now on. Determine whether or not to execute the effect. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone fanning effect is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1310-11, and when it determines that the zone fanning effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310-15.

In step S1310-11, the sub CPU 102a selects the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 67 (b)) for the zone fanning effect, and in step S1310-12, the effect symbol stop display pattern for the zone fanning effect. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the zone fanning effect, the fanning effect type defined by the zone precursor effect scenario, a plurality of types of effect symbol stop display patterns, and each effect symbol are displayed. The selection rate (%) of the stop display pattern is uniquely associated and stored.

For example, if the type of the fanning effect this time is the fanning success effect, the combination of "look-ahead" symbol, "rush" symbol, and "zone" symbol (special symbol alignment) is 100% selection rate as the effect symbol stop display pattern. It will be decided. In addition, if the type of the fanning effect this time is the fanning failure effect 1, the effect symbol stop display pattern is a combination of "look-ahead" symbol, "1 (green)" symbol, "zone" symbol, or "look-ahead" symbol, "5". The combination of the "(green)" symbol and the "zone" symbol will be determined with a selectivity of 50% each.

In step S1310-13, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1310-14, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect symbol stop display control command for the zone fanning effect corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and performs the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. finish.

The sub CPU 102a confirms the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1310-15, and corresponds to the effect mode in step S1310-16. A normal effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see, for example, FIG. 67 (c)) is selected, and in step S1310-17, a normal effect symbol stop display pattern is determined.

As shown in FIG. 67 (c), the normal effect symbol stop display pattern determination table according to the effect mode includes the effect symbol designation command, the special symbol lottery result, and a plurality of types of normal effect symbol stop display patterns. , The selection rate (%) of each normal effect symbol stop display pattern is uniquely associated and stored.

In step S1310-18, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the normal effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined normal effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1310-19, the sub CPU 102a sets a normal effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the determined normal effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the present effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. do.

The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer in step S1310-8, step S1310-14, step S1310-19, etc. described above is the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. Will be sent to. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the image display device displays the effect symbol based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command. The stop display is displayed on the display unit 140 of 14.

Therefore, in the chance eye notice effect, the effect symbol related to the chance eye notice effect is stopped and displayed on the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the display unit 140. Further, in the fanning success effect, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed on the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the display unit 140. Further, in the fanning failure effect 1, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed in the left side area and the right side area of the display unit 140, and the normal effect symbol related to the fanning effect is displayed in the central area. It will be displayed as stopped. Further, in the fanning failure effect 2, the special symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped and displayed on the left side area of the display unit 140, and the normal effect symbol related to the fanning effect is stopped on the center area and the right side area. It will be displayed.

(Variable effect pattern determination process of the effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

In step S1312-1, by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area, the current effect mode and Check the look-ahead zone production scenario.

In step S1312-2, the variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 69 to 73) associated with the current effect mode and the look-ahead zone effect scenario is selected. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table for determining the effect content of the variation effect is set in association with the effect modes (effect modes A to C) and the look-ahead zone effect scenario.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 73, in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with each effect mode, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the selection rate by the random number for the variation effect pattern determination ( %), The type of the variation effect pattern to be selected, the variation effect control command corresponding to the variation effect pattern, the time of the variation effect corresponding to the variation effect pattern, and the effect content of the variation effect are associated with each other.

The variable effect pattern is an effect mode of the variable effect, and the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and the effect device 17 are determined by determining the variable effect pattern. The specific effect content (mode) of the variable effect performed by the effect button device 18 will also be determined. For example, the effect content of the variable effect in the image display device 14 includes the variable display mode of the effect symbol (presence or absence of pseudo continuous effect), the presence or absence of reach effect, the content of reach effect, the component of the variable effect such as the effect development configuration. Are associated with each other. Details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In step S1312-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-4, the random number counter related to the random number for determining the variation effect pattern is set. By acquiring the indicated random number value and collating the determination result of the jackpot determination, the special figure variation pattern specification command, and the random number for determining the variation effect pattern with the variation effect pattern determination table selected in step S1312-2 in step S1312-5. Determine the variation effect pattern.

In step S1312-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a variation effect control command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-7, sets the variation effect time, which is the effect time of the variation effect. It is set in the variation effect timer counter of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S132-8, the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern is set in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the variation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 causes the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command.

Further, the fluctuation effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the variation effect, by the variation effect timer counter.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table)
FIGS. 69 to 73 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern. 69 to 71 are the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode A, FIG. 72 is the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode B, and FIG. 73 is the variation effect pattern determination for the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the table.

Of the variation effect pattern determination tables for the effect mode A, FIG. 69 is a table selected when the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect are not executed, and FIG. 70 (a) shows the zone fanning failure effect 1. FIG. 70 (b) is a table selected at the time of execution, FIG. 70 (b) is a table selected at the time of executing the zone fanning failure effect 2, and FIG. 70 (c) is a table selected at the time of executing the zone fanning success effect. Yes, FIG. 71 is a table selected during execution of the look-ahead zone effect.

Here, each term described in the effect content of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 to 73 will be described.

"No pseudo-fanning" means that the pseudo-fanning effect that suggests the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect or whether or not the chance eye is temporarily stopped (expecting the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed. .. The "pseudo-fan failure" means that the pseudo-fan effect is executed, but the pseudo-continuous pattern and the chance eye are not temporarily stopped. "Successful pseudo-fanning" means that the pseudo-fanning effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbols and chance eyes are temporarily stopped. The "pseudo-ream" means that the temporarily stopped effect symbol is re-variated.

The "reach fanning failure" means that the reach fanning effect is executed depending on whether or not the reach effect is executed, but the reach is not established and the reach effect is not executed. "Successful reach fanning" means that the reach fanning effect is executed, the reach is established, and the reach effect is executed.

The “shortening variation” means that the shortening variation effect in which the effect time (fluctuation time) is shorter than the normal variation (6 seconds or 8 seconds) and reach does not occur is executed. The "ultra-shortening variation" means that an ultra-shortening variation effect is executed in which the effect time (fluctuation time) is shorter than the shortened variation effect (2 seconds or 4 seconds) and reach does not occur.

"N reach" means that the normal reach effect is executed. "N reach (transition production)" is a transition production (development production) that suggests the development to normal reach production, SP reach production, and SPSP reach production (executed in the process of developing into SP reach production and SPSP reach production). Means that is executed. "N reach (transition / return effect)" means that the normal reach effect and the transition effect are executed, but the return effect does not develop into the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect.

The “SP reach 1” means that the first SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. The “SP reach 2” means that the second SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. The second SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (execution of a special game) is higher than that of the first SP reach effect.

The “SP reach 3” means that the third SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The “SP reach 4” means that the fourth SP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The 4th SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (execution of a special game) is higher than that of the 3rd SP reach effect.

The “SP reach 5” means that a dedicated (unique) fifth SP reach effect is executed in the effect mode C (low probability time-short game state). The “SP reach 6” means that a dedicated (unique) sixth SP reach effect is executed in the effect mode C (low accuracy time and short game state). The 6th SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (execution of a special game) is higher than that of the 5th SP reach effect.

The “SPSP reach 1” means that the first SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. The “SPSP reach 2” means that the second SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. The second SPSP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (the special game is executed) is higher than that of the first SPSP reach effect.

The “SPSP reach 3” means that the third SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The “SPSP reach 4” means that the fourth SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) to the effect mode B (probability variation game state) is executed. The 4th SPSP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (execution of a special game) is higher than that of the 3rd SPSP reach effect.

The “SPSP reach 5” means that a dedicated (unique) fifth SPSP reach effect is executed in the effect mode C (low probability time-short game state). The “SPSP reach 6” means that the sixth SPSP reach effect dedicated (unique) is executed in the effect mode C (low accuracy time and short game state). The 6th SPSP reach effect is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (execution of a special game) is higher than that of the 5th SPSP reach effect.

The “ST effect 1” means that the first step effect, which is the first step of the story effect composed of a plurality of steps (steps), is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. “ST effect 2” means that the second step effect, which is the second step of the story effect, is executed. “ST effect 3” means that the third step effect, which is the final step of the story effect, is executed.

In addition, in the story production, it is highly expected that the big hit will be won because the step production progresses to the next and subsequent step productions along with the temporary stop and re-variation (special production) of the production symbols in the pseudo-continuous production. It is a preview effect that suggests (expects the execution of a special game), and suggests that the expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than when the story effect is not executed. It is a kind. Further, the degree of expectation of winning the special game when each step effect of the story effect is executed is 1st step effect <2nd step effect <3rd step effect.

The “zone fanning failure 1” means that the zone fanning failure effect 1 that incites whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed is executed. The “zone fanning failure 2” means that the zone fanning failure effect 2 that fuels whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed is executed. "Successful zone fanning" means that the zone fanning success effect that notifies (directs) that the look-ahead zone effect is executed is executed.

The “zone effect” means that the first zone effect of the look-ahead zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The “heat zone effect” means that the second zone effect of the look-ahead zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

The look-ahead zone effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect that expects a big hit by executing the zone effect over one or more variable effects (variable display of special symbols), and the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is high. It is a kind of predictive production that suggests that it is high. Further, the degree of expectation of winning the special game when each look-ahead zone effect is executed is 1 zone effect <2nd zone effect.

In this way, each variation effect pattern determination table is executed by the image display device 14 by setting a dedicated variation effect pattern or setting various effects to be executed at different ratios. The effect mode of the variable effect is different for each effect mode (game state). The type of the variable effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the probabilistic game state may be the same, or the type of the variable effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the low probability time-short game state may be the same. Alternatively, the type of the variable effect pattern executed in the probability variation game state and the low probability time reduction game state may be the same.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73 is that if the variation effect patterns have the same effect time (variation time), they are more simulated than the variation effect patterns in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. One point is that the variable production pattern in which the continuous production is executed has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot (the special game is executed). By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous production is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73, if the effect time (variation time) is the same variation effect pattern, the pseudo continuous effect is executed without the story effect. There is a point that the expectation of a big hit (a special game is executed) is higher in the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed with the story effect than in the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by a story production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73, a specific reach is performed by executing a transition effect after a story effect (corresponding to a sign effect) is executed as a variation effect pattern. The first story pseudo-variable production pattern (corresponding to the first specific production mode) that develops into the production (SP / SPSP reach production), and the transition production is executed after the story production is executed, but the return production is executed. The second story pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the second specific effect mode), in which the transition effect is executed after returning to the story effect and develops into a specific reach effect, is set. By doing so, it is possible to execute a novel variation effect that has never existed in the past, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73, the second story pseudo variation effect pattern wins a big hit (special game is executed) than the first story pseudo variation effect pattern. There is a high degree of expectation. By doing so, when the story production is executed, the player's expectation as to whether it is the first story pseudo-variable production pattern or the second story pseudo-variable production pattern can be raised, and the interest of the game can be raised. Can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73, the story effect of returning after the return effect is executed in the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern is the first before the execution of the transition effect. The point is that it is not the second step effect following the step effect but the third step effect (step skipping is performed with the transition effect in between). By doing so, the difference between the first story pseudo-variable effect pattern and the second story pseudo-variable effect pattern can be clarified, and the player's expectation for the second story pseudo-variable effect pattern can be raised. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned second story pseudo-variation effect pattern, the story effect of returning after the return effect is executed is set as the third step effect, but it may be set as the second step effect. Further, the pattern in which the second step effect is executed after the return effect is executed is defined as the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern, and the pattern in which the third step effect is executed after the return effect is executed is the third story pseudo-variation effect pattern. Then, when each story pseudo-variation effect pattern is executed, the expectation of winning the jackpot (the special game is executed) is set to the first story pseudo-variation effect pattern <second story pseudo-variation effect pattern <third story pseudo-variation effect. It may be a pattern. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the step skipping is performed with the return effect in between, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in each story pseudo-variable effect pattern, the SPSP reach effect may be executed via the SP reach effect after the transition effect, or the SPSP reach effect may be performed after the transition effect without going through the SP reach effect. You may want to do it. Further, although the story effect (predictive effect) is executed in the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, it may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

As the first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, as the variation effect pattern, a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach) is performed by executing a transition effect after the zone effect (corresponding to a predictive effect) is executed. The first zone pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the first specific effect mode) that develops into (effect), and the transition effect is executed after the zone effect is executed, but the return effect is executed to return to the zone effect. A second zone pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the second specific effect mode) is set, in which the transition effect is executed after that and the specific reach effect is developed. By doing so, it is possible to execute a novel variation effect that has never existed in the past, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71 is that the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern is more likely to win a big hit (special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern described above. Is high. By doing so, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether it is the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern. It is possible to improve the interest.

As the third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern has a higher expectation of winning a big hit (special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern. There are points. By doing so, when the zone effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether it is the first zone pseudo-variation effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern can be raised, and the interest of the game can be raised. Can be improved.

The fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71 is that the transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but the return effect is executed to return to the second zone effect before the transition. One point is that a third zone pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the third specific effect mode) in which the effect is executed and develops into a specific reach effect is set. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the zone effect is promoted with the return effect in between, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the third zone pseudo-variation effect pattern has a higher expectation of winning a big hit (a special game is executed) than the second zone pseudo-variation effect pattern. There are points. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to which of the first to third zone pseudo-variable effect patterns is when the zone effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

In each zone pseudo-variable effect pattern, it was assumed that after the transition effect, the SP reach effect was transferred (developed) and then the SPSP reach effect was transferred (developed), but the SP reach effect was not followed after the transition effect. You may shift (develop) to SPSP reach production. Further, although the zone effect (predictive effect) is executed in the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, it may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

Further, although the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect are not executed in the effect mode B (probability variation game state) and the effect mode C (low probability short game state), they are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. It may be executed in the effect mode B or the effect mode C.

Further, the execution probabilities of the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be different in each effect mode. The read-ahead zone effect may be executed so that the execution probability is low (effect mode A> effect mode B, effect mode A> effect mode C, effect mode A> effect mode C> effect mode B, etc.), or vice versa. In order to further raise the expectations of the player, the more advantageous the production mode is for the player, the higher the probability of executing the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect (production mode A <production mode B, production mode A <production). Mode C, effect mode A <effect mode C <effect mode B, etc.) may be used.

Further, in each effect mode, only the look-ahead zone effect may be executed without executing the zone precursor effect, or the zone precursor effect and the look-ahead zone effect may be executed in some effect modes, but in other effect modes. Only the look-ahead zone effect may be executed. Even in this case, the execution probabilities of the look-ahead zone effects in each effect mode may be different as described above.

(Probability production judgment processing of the production control board)
The accuracy effect determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 74.

In step S1313-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the jackpot determination result and the variation effect pattern, and in step S1313-2, acquires the random value for determining the correct effect pattern.

In step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current time-saving game state (including high-accuracy time-saving and low-accuracy time-saving) is determined. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game is not in the time-saving game state, the process shifts to step S1313-4, and when it determines that the time-saving game state is not set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1313-5.

In step S1313-4, the sub CPU 102a selects the probability effect pattern determination table 1 (see FIG. 75 (a)) and shifts the process to step S1313-6. In step S1313-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the accuracy effect pattern determination table 2 (see FIG. 75B) and shifts the process to step S1313-6. The accuracy effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 75.

In step S1313-6, the sub CPU 102a determines the winning effect pattern by collating the selected winning effect pattern determination table with the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern, the random number value for determining the winning effect pattern, and the like.

The correct effect pattern is an execution mode of the correct effect that deterministically notifies (suggests) that the result of the variable display (variable effect) is a big hit, and the pattern in which the correct effect is not executed and the audio output device 15 There is a pattern in which the correct effect is executed by the combination of the sound effect and the effect lighting device 16 and the light emission effect by the handle lighting device 33, and a pattern in which the correct effect is executed by the blower effect by the blower device 34.

In step S1313-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the determined winning effect pattern is the winning effect execution pattern for which the winning effect is to be executed. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the pattern is the correct effect execution pattern, the process shifts to step S1313-8, and when it is determined that the pattern is not the correct effect execution pattern, the sub CPU 102a ends the true probability effect determination process.

In step S1313-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the probability effect pattern command corresponding to the probability effect execution pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the true probability effect determination process.

The correct effect pattern command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the correct effect pattern command, the lamp control board 104 causes various production devices to execute the correct effect based on the correct effect pattern indicated by the command at the timing based on the correct effect pattern. ..

(Probable production pattern determination table)
FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing a winning effect pattern determination table 1 referred to in a normal gaming state, and FIG. 75 (b) is a winning effect referred to in a high-accuracy time-short game state or a low-accuracy time-short game state. It is a figure which shows the pattern determination table 2.

In the winning effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern, the execution rate (%) of the accuracy effect based on the random value for determining the accuracy effect pattern, and the selection rate of the execution location of the accuracy effect are displayed. , The type of the selected correct effect pattern is uniquely associated and stored.

The execution location of the correct effect is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started on the image display device 14, and the reach effect is performed on the image display device 14 at the first frame of the fluctuation start. SP which is the timing when the image of the first frame is displayed when the image is started SP, which is the timing when the image of the first frame is displayed when the SP reach effect is started on the image display device 14 The first frame of the reach start, the first frame of the SPSP reach start, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame when the SPSP reach effect is started on the image display device 14, is set.

The correct effect pattern 0 is a correct effect pattern in which the correct effect is not executed, the correct effect pattern 1 is the correct effect pattern in which the correct effect is executed in the first frame of the fluctuation start, and the correct effect pattern 2 is the reach start 1 The correct effect pattern 3 is the correct effect pattern in which the correct effect is executed at the frame, the correct effect pattern 3 is the correct effect pattern in which the correct effect is executed at the first frame of the SP reach start, and the correct effect pattern 4 is the SPSP reach start 1 This is a correct effect pattern in which the correct effect is executed at the frame.

Further, the correct effect patterns 1A to 4A are the first correct effect patterns composed of the sound effect performed by the voice output device 15 and the light emission effect performed by the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33. 1B to 4B are the second reliable effect patterns composed of the blower effect performed by the blower device 34.

As the first feature of the accuracy effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the accuracy effect pattern is determined with reference to the accuracy effect pattern determination table 2 rather than the case where the accuracy effect pattern is determined with reference to the accuracy effect pattern determination table 1. One point is that it is set so that the execution rate of the correct effect is higher when it is decided.

By doing so, the correct effect is executed with a higher probability in the (high accuracy / low accuracy) time-saving game state than in the normal game state, and while maintaining the rarity of the correct effect in the normal game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the time-saving game state in which the game wants to proceed smoothly. It should be noted that the execution probability of the winning effect may be set to be the same in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, or the relationship may be reversed.

As the second feature of the accuracy effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the accuracy effect pattern is determined with reference to the accuracy effect pattern determination table 2 rather than the case where the accuracy effect pattern is determined with reference to the accuracy effect pattern determination table 1. One point is that the case where the determination is made is set so that the correct effect can be easily executed at an earlier stage (stage) of the variable display (variable effect).

By doing so, in the normal game state, the correct effect is likely to be executed at a time when the fluctuation display is late, and in the time-saving game state (probability variable game state), the correct effect is likely to be executed at an early stage of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of delay in the time-saving game state (probability variable game state) while pulling the player's expectation for the jackpot game in the normal game state until the time when the fluctuation display is late. In addition, the execution time of the winning effect may be set in the same manner in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, or may be set so as to have the opposite relationship.

As the third feature of the accuracy effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the first probability effect pattern and the second probability effect pattern are determined in the normal gaming state, whereas the (high accuracy / low accuracy) time-saving gaming state is determined. Then, there is a point that it is set so that only the first correct effect pattern is determined.

By doing so, it becomes easier to execute the winning effect by the first winning effect pattern, which is more conspicuous than the second winning effect pattern, in the time-saving game state which is advantageous for the player, so that the player's delight and uplifting feeling can be effectively performed. It becomes possible to incite and improve the interest of the game. In the time-saving game state, the second winning effect pattern may be determined at the same ratio as the first winning effect pattern, or may be determined at a different ratio from the first winning effect pattern. Further, in the normal gaming state, only one of the first winning effect pattern and the second winning effect pattern is determined, and in the time-saving gaming state, only one of the first winning effect pattern and the second winning effect pattern is determined. It may be decided.

(Pre-reading zone effect execution judgment processing of the effect control board)
The look-ahead zone effect execution determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-2, executes the read-ahead zone effect. It is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead zone effect in the (current) variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation pattern specification command related to the determination process. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1314-3, and when it is determined that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a ends the main look-ahead zone effect execution determination process.

In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the look-ahead zone effect control command corresponding to the look-ahead zone effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-4, sets the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect to the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer of.

The read-ahead zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the look-ahead zone effect control command, the look-ahead zone effect is executed by the current variation effect, and when the look-ahead zone effect control command is not received, this time. Do not execute the look-ahead zone effect in the variable effect of.

Further, the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of the currently displayed icon to the look-ahead zone effect notification mode if the display mode is not the look-ahead zone effect notification mode. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command for the look-ahead zone effect, if the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode, the image control board 105 continues the look-ahead zone effect notification mode.

(Icon change notice execution judgment processing of the production control board)
The icon change notice execution determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

In step S1315-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data stored in the storage area of the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-2, this time (related to the present icon change notice determination process). (Corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) Judges whether or not to execute the throwing kiss notice in the fluctuation effect.

When the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed, the process shifts to step S1315-3, and when it determines that the throwing kiss notice is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1315-4.

In step S1315-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a throwing kiss notice effect control command indicating the effect content according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1315-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines the icon change notice. End the process. Here, in the "effect content according to the icon display mode scenario", the icon related to the throwing kiss notice hits the thrown heart when the character throws the throwing kiss or leaves, and the throwing heart hits the throwing kiss (notice of the notice). The target icon), whether or not to change the display mode of the icon, and the display mode after the change when the icon is changed are included.

The throwing kiss notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the throwing kiss notice effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the throwing kiss notice to be executed according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received throwing kiss notice effect control command. Details of the throwing kiss notice will be described later.

In step S1315-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the handshake event notice in the current variation effect (corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command related to the icon change determination process), and gives the handshake event notice. If it is determined that the event is to be executed, the process is moved to step S135-5, and if it is determined that the handshake event notice is not executed, the icon change notice determination process is terminated.

In step S1315-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a handshake event notice effect control command indicating the effect content according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1315-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines the icon change notice. End the process. Here, the "effect content according to the icon display mode scenario" includes the number of lines in the handshake event notice and the change pattern of the display mode of the changing icon.

The handshake event notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the handshake event notice effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the handshake event notice to be executed according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received handshake event notice effect control command. Details of the handshake event notice will be described later.

(Pre-reading zone effect end determination process on the effect control board)
The look-ahead zone effect end determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 78.

In step S1318-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the look-ahead zone effect scenario indicated by the look-ahead zone effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and the look-ahead zone effect ends in the current variation effect. Judge whether or not. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the look-ahead zone effect is finished, it shifts the process to step S1318-2, and when it determines that the look-ahead zone effect is not finished, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1318-4.

In step S1318-2, the sub CPU 102a sets the read-ahead zone effect end control command for ending the look-ahead zone effect and returning to the background image or the like for the effect mode A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The read-ahead zone effect end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-reading zone effect end control command, the pre-reading zone effect is terminated, and the background image, the BGM, and the lighting effect mode of the effect lighting device 16 are used for the current effect mode. Return to the one.

In step S1318-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the display mode of all the icons displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode to the normal mode by executing the look-ahead zone effect (hereinafter, “first”. (Reset icon effect control command) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

As a result, the icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and all the icons of the look-ahead zone effect notification mode displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are changed to the normal mode. Processing for changing (restoring) is performed.

In step S1318-4, the sub CPU 102a confirms the zone precursor effect scenario indicated by the zone precursor effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and the gasse zone precursor effect ends in this variation effect. Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the Gase zone precursor effect is completed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1318-5, and when it is determined that the Gase zone precursor effect is not completed, the sub CPU 102a ends the pre-reading zone effect end determination process.

In step S1318-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the display mode of all the icons displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode to the normal mode by executing the gasse zone precursor effect (hereinafter, “second”. (Reset icon effect control command) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

As a result, the second reset icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the icons of all the look-ahead zone effect suggestion modes displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are displayed. A process for changing (returning) to the normal mode is performed.

(Customer waiting display control processing on the production control board)
The customer waiting display control process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

In step S1400-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the menu is currently being displayed while waiting for a customer. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the menu display execution flag "01M" is set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the menu display is in progress, the process shifts to step S1400-2, and when it determines that the menu display is not in progress, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1400-5.

In step S1400-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been operated has been input. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect button 18A has been operated, the process shifts to step S1400-3, and when it determines that the effect button 18A has not been operated, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1400-9.

In step S1400-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a menu display end command for instructing the end of the menu display in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1400-4.

In step S1400-4, the sub CPU 102a clears the menu display execution flag "01M" set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1400-5.

In step S1400-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the customer waiting state, it shifts the process to step S1400-6, and when it determines that it is not in the customer waiting state, it shifts the process to step S1400-9.

In step S1400-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been operated has been input. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect button 18A has been operated, the process shifts to step S1400-7, and when it determines that the effect button 18A has not been operated, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1400-9.

In step S1400-7, the sub CPU 102a sets a menu display start command for instructing the start of the menu display in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1400-8.

In step S1400-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the menu display execution flag “01M” in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1400-9.

The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1400-9 whether or not the variation effect or the jackpot game has been started. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the variation effect or the jackpot game has started, the process shifts to step S1400-10, and when it determines that the variation effect or the jackpot game has not started, the sub CPU 102a ends the customer waiting display control process.

In step S1400-10, the sub CPU 102a clears the information related to the customer waiting state set in the sub RAM 102c, and ends the main customer waiting display control process. Specifically, the menu display execution flag set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c is cleared.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the menu is displayed by operating the effect button 18A in the customer waiting state in which the variable effect or the jackpot game is not executed, and is displayed by operating the effect button 18A again. The menu display that had been displayed is now erased from the image display device 14.

◇ (Right-handed display control process 1 on the production control board)
The right-handed display control process 1 of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

In the right-handed display control process of the effect control board 102 in the present embodiment, the player is directed to the right area 2AR of the game area 2A during the high-accuracy time-short game state, the low-accuracy time-short game state, and the round of the jackpot game. The first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG, OMG) is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in order to encourage the game ball to be launched (FIGS. 82 (b) to (OMG). d) See).

Further, when the game ball is entered into the first starting port 6 of the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A during the high-accuracy time-short game state, the low-accuracy time-short game state, or the jackpot game, the player is notified. In order to strongly urge the game ball to be launched toward the right side region 2AR, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the second right-handed image KMG2 or the second right-handed image KMG1 is placed in the center of the display unit 140 where the first right-handed image KMG1 is already displayed. 3 Right-handed image KMG3 is additionally displayed. The specific mode of displaying the first right-handed image KMG1 to the third right-handed image KMG3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

In step S1700-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is currently being displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, whether or not the second right-handed display flag "02R" is set in the second right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, or the third right-handed display in the third right-handed display flag storage area. It is determined whether or not the flag "03R" is set. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is not being displayed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1700-2 and is displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3. If it is determined that the above is true, the process proceeds to step S1700-6.

In step S1700-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the first right-handed image KMG1 is currently being displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first right-handed display flag "01R" is set in the first right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first right-handed image KMG1 is being displayed, it shifts the process to step S1700-10, and if it determines that the first right-handed image KMG1 is not being displayed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1700-3. ..

In step S1700-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming state has been changed to the jackpot gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state). Specifically, whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command, and in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode flag “01H” is stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. -It is determined whether or not "04H" is set. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the jackpot gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1700-4, and determines that the gaming state has not been changed to the jackpot gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. , Ends this right-handed display control process.

In step S1700-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the first right-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the first right-handed image KMG1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-5. .. The first right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the first right-handed image KMG1 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "first right-handed notification" will be executed. The details of the "first right-handed notification" will be described later.

In step S1700-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the first right-handed display flag “01R” in the first right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the right-handed display control process.

In step S1700-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the second right-handed display time or the third right-handed display time set in the second right-handed display time timer counter or the third right-handed display time timer counter has elapsed. Is determined. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the second right-handed display time or the third right-handed display time has elapsed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1700-7, and the second right-handed display time or the third right-handed display time has not elapsed. If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S1700-9.

In step S1700-7, the sub CPU 102a instructs the end of the "second right-handed notification" including the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the "third right-handed notification" including the display of the third right-handed image KMG3. Therefore, the second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process is transferred to step S1700-8. The second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and is transmitted by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to "the second right-handed display end command". "2 Right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" will be terminated.

In step S1700-8, the sub CPU 102a has the second right-handed display flag “02R” in the second right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c or the third right-handed display flag “03R” in the third right-handed display flag storage area. Is cleared, and the process is moved to step S1700-2.

The sub CPU 102a determines in step S1700-9 whether or not the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state, it shifts the process to step S1700-7, and when it determines that the gaming state has not been changed to the normal gaming state, it shifts the process to step S1700-2.

In step S1700-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state or whether the jackpot game state has ended. Specifically, whether or not the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, or the command stored in the receive buffer specifies the ending. Determine if it is a command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game state has been changed to the normal game state or the jackpot game state has ended, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1700-11, and the game state is not changed to the normal game state, or If it is determined that the state of the jackpot game is not completed, the process is moved to step S1700-13.

In step S1700-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the first right-handed display end command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in order to instruct the end of the "first right-handed notification" including the display of the first right-handed image KMG1. , Step S1700-12. The first right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the "first right-handed display notification". Will be.

In step S1700-12, the sub CPU 102a clears the first right-handed display flag “01R” in the first right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the right-handed display control process.

In step S1700-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered the first starting port 6, the process shifts to step S1700-14, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 6, the sub CPU 102a hits the ball to the right. End the display control process.

In step S1700-14, the sub CPU 102a adds "1" to the counter value of the first starting port entry number counter N to update the counter value, and shifts the process to step S1700-15.

In step S1700-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the first starting port entry number counter N is 2 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 2 or more, it ends the right-handed display control process, and if it determines that the counter value of the first starting port entry counter N is 2 or more, step S1700-16 Move the process to.

In step S1700-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the customer waiting state, it shifts the process to step S1700-21, and when it determines that it is not in the customer waiting state, it shifts the process to step S1700-17.

In step S1700-17, the sub CPU 102a sets the second right-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in order to instruct the start of the display of the second right-handed image KMG2, and shifts the process to step S1700-18. .. The second right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "second right-handed notification" will be executed. The details of the "second right-handed notification" will be described later.

In step S1700-18, the sub CPU 102a sets the second right-handed display flag “02R” in the second right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-19.

In step S1700-19, the sub CPU 102a sets the right-handed display time (for example, 10 seconds) in the second right-handed display time timer counter or the third right-handed display time timer counter, and processes in step S1700-20. To move.

In step S1700-20, the sub CPU 102a clears the first start port entry number counter value N, and shifts the process to step S1700-3.

In step S1700-21, the sub CPU 102a sets a third right-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the third right-handed image KMG3 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-22. .. The third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the third right-handed image KMG3 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "third right-handed notification" will be executed. The details of the "third right-handed notification" will be described later.

In step S1700-22, the sub CPU 102a sets the third right-handed display flag “03R” in the third right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-19.

Here, in the right-handed display control process, in step S1700-15 described above, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first starting port entry number counter N is 2 or more, and the counter value is 2 or more. If it is determined that there is, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is set in step S1700-17 or step S1700-21 described above, but the first start port entry ball is set. When the counter value of the number counter N is 1 or more, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command may be set in step S1700-17 or step S1700-21. In this case, when the ball entering the first starting port 6 is detected, the player is immediately given a "second right-handed notification" including a second right-handed display or a "second right-handed notification" including a third right-handed display. The "third right-handed notification" can be executed.

Further, in the right-handed display control process, "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" is executed based on the detection of the ball entering the first starting port 6. However, it is not limited to entering the ball into the first starting port 6, and instead of entering the ball into the first starting port 6, the predetermined positions to the first to third general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3 are used. When a number of balls are detected, the "second right-handed notification" or the "third right-handed notification" may be executed.

◇ (Left-handed display control process 1 on the production control board)
The left-handed display control process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

In the left-handed display control process of the effect control board 102 in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is changed from the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state or the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state to the normal gaming state, the player is notified of the left side of the gaming area 2A. As shown in FIG. 116 (c), the first left-handed image 1612 is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in order to encourage the game ball to be launched toward the area 2AL. The specific mode of displaying the first left-handed image 1612 will be described later with reference to FIG. 116.

Further, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10 of the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A during the normal game state, the game ball is launched toward the left side area 2AL to the player. In order to encourage what to do, as shown in FIGS. 117 (b) and 118 (b), the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. There is. Specific aspects of the display of the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

In step S1800-1, the sub CPU 102a is currently displaying an image of any one of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14. Judge whether or not. Specifically, whether or not the first left-handed display flag "01L" is set in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the second left-handed display flag "01L" in the second left-handed display flag storage area. It is determined whether or not "02L" is set, and whether or not the third left-handed display flag "03L" is set in the third left-handed display flag storage area. When the sub CPU 102a determines that any one of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1800-6. If it is determined that none of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1800-2.

In step S1800-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming state has been changed from the high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state or the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game state has been changed to the normal game state, the process shifts to step S1800-3, and when it determines that the state has not been changed to the normal game state, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1800-9.

In step S1800-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the first left-handed display start command for instructing the start of the display of the first left-handed image 1612 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-4. .. The first left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the first left-handed image 1612 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "first left-handed notification" will be executed. The details of the "first left-handed notification" will be described later.

In step S1800-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the first left-handed display flag “01L” in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-5.

In step S1800-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the left-handed display time (for example, 3 seconds) to the first left-handed display time timer counter, the second left-handed display time timer counter, or the third left-handed display time timer. Set it in the counter and end the left-handed display control process.

In step S1800-6, the sub CPU 102a left-strokes the timer counter set in any of the first left-handed display time timer counter, the second left-handed display time timer counter, and the third left-handed display time timer counter. Determine if the display time has elapsed. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the left-handed display time has elapsed for any of the timer counters, it shifts the process to step S1800-7, and determines that the left-handed display time has not elapsed for any of the timer counters. The hit display control process ends.

When the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1800-7 that the display time of the first left-handed image 1612 has elapsed based on the timer counter that determines that the left-handed display time has elapsed in step S1800-6, the sub CPU 102a determines that the left-handed display time has elapsed. When it is determined that the display time of the second left-handed image 1622 has elapsed, the first left-handed display end command is issued, and the display time of the third left-handed image 1632 has elapsed. If it is determined, the third left-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process is transferred to step S1800-8.

Here, since the first left-handed display end command instructs the end of the "first left-handed notification" including the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed display end command is the second left-handed image 1622. In order to instruct the end of the "second left-handed notification" including the display, the third left-handed display end command is a sub to instruct the end of the "third left-handed notification" including the display of the third left-handed image 1632. It is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 102c.
The first to third left-handed display end commands are transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 "notify the first left-handed". Alternatively, the "second left-handed notification" or the "third left-handed notification" will be terminated.

In step S1800-8, the sub CPU 102a terminates the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632, and is assumed to end the display of the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Clear the first left-handed display flag "01L", the second left-handed display flag "02L" in the second left-handed display flag storage area, and the third left-handed display flag "03L" in the third left-handed display flag storage area. ..

In step S1800-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10, the process shifts to step S1800-12, and when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the winning gate 10, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1800-10.

In step S1800-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the fourth general winning opening entry ball designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered the 4th general winning opening 11-4, the process shifts to step S1800-12, and determines that the game ball has not entered the 4th general winning opening 11-4. Then, the process is transferred to step S1800-11.

In step S1800-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 7. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the second start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered the second starting port 7, the process shifts to step S1800-12, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 7, this left-handed display is displayed. End the control process.

In step S1800-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming state is currently the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process shifts to step S1700-13, and when it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the left-handed display control process ends.

In step S1800-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the customer waiting state, it shifts the process to step S1800-14, and determines that it is not in the customer waiting state, that is, that the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 is changing the effect symbol. , Step S1800-16.

In step S1800-14, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in order to instruct the start of the display of the second left-handed image 1622, and shifts the process to step S1800-15. .. The second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the second left-handed image 1622 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "second left-handed notification" will be executed. The details of the "second left-handed notification" will be described later.

In step S1800-15, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display flag “02L” in the second left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-5.

In step S1800-16, the sub CPU 102a sets a third left-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the third left-handed image 1632 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-17. .. The third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the third left-handed image 1632 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "third left-handed notification" will be executed. The details of the "third left-handed notification" will be described later.

In step S1800-17, the sub CPU 102a sets the third left-handed display flag “03L” in the third left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-5.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the second left-handed image 1622 in the customer waiting state shown in steps S1800-14 to S1800-15 and the variation of the effect symbol shown in steps S1800-16 to S1800-17. It is also possible to make the execution conditions of each image display different from the display of the third left-handed image 1632 inside. In this case, for example, the processes shown in steps S1800-14 to S1800-15 are the processes associated with the passage of the winning gate 10, while the processes shown in steps S1800-16 to S1800-17 are the fourth general winning openings. By performing the process associated with entering the ball at 11-4 or entering the second starting port 7, the display of the second left-handed image 1622 while waiting for customers is executed by passing through the winning gate 10, and the effect pattern is displayed. The display of the 3rd left-handed image 1632 during the fluctuation of is executed by entering the 4th general winning opening 11-4 or the 2nd starting opening 7, and by exchanging the processing contents, It is also possible to reverse the execution conditions.

(Display example of image display device in each game state)
Next, a display example of the image display device 14 in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 (a) is a display example during the normal gaming state (effect mode A), and FIG. 82 (b) is a display example during the high-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode B). ) Is a display example during the low-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode C), and FIG. 82 (d) is a display example during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), during the normal gaming state, the effect mode image AMG indicating that the effect mode is A is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit 140 is displayed. Three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area. NS.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), during the high-probability time-short game state, the effect mode image BMG indicating that the effect mode B is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit. The right-handed image KMG1 which is the above-mentioned high-accuracy display mode is displayed on the upper right side of the 140, and the jackpot number of consecutive villas image KRG which is the above-mentioned high-accuracy display mode is displayed near the upper center of the display unit 140. Is displayed, and the high-probability remaining number image KKG, which is the display mode for high accuracy described above, is displayed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are arranged side by side in the central portion of the display unit 140. Three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 displayed on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the low-accuracy time-short game state, the effect mode image CMG indicating that the effect mode is C is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit is displayed. The right-handed image ZMG, which is the above-mentioned display mode for time saving, is displayed on the upper right side of the 140, and the jackpot consecutive villa number image ZRG, which is the above-mentioned display mode for time saving, is displayed near the center of the upper part of the display unit 140. On the lower left side of the display unit 140, the time reduction remaining number image ZKG, which is the above-mentioned display mode for time reduction, is displayed, and in the center of the display unit 140, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side, and the display unit Three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

As shown in FIG. 82 (d), during the jackpot game (during the opening), the right-handed image OMG1 which is the above-mentioned display mode during the jackpot is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. An opening image OPG indicating that the opening of the jackpot game is displayed is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140.

The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, which are mainly displayed during the normal game state (waiting for the customer waiting effect, during the variable effect of the normal reach or less, which is frequently executed, etc.), are a vertically long rectangular pattern base image ZBG and nine types of characters. It is a composite image in which a character image CYG showing any of the above and an identification image SG showing any number 1 to 9 corresponding to 9 types of characters on a one-to-one basis are superimposed, and is highly decorative (). The design is complicated, there are many colors, bright colors, etc.) It is the effect symbol (first effect symbol) of the first display mode.

The character image CYG is a single image that imitates any of nine types of characters, and the identification image SG superimposes a hexagonal base image and a numerical image (identifier) of any of 1 to 9. It is a composite image.

The effect symbol of the first display mode may be stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, or the symbol base image ZBG, the character image CYG, and the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb to store the image. It may be combined when displaying on the display device 14. Further, the base image and the numerical image constituting the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb and combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

In the present embodiment, even during the normal gaming state, from the start of the transition effect (development effect) to the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect in the variable effect, that is, the effect symbols TZ1 to as will be described later. During the period when TZ3 is displayed in a reduced size, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in the second display mode (second effect symbol) described later, but in most of the other periods, the effect symbols TZ1 to Since TZ3 is displayed in the first display mode, it can be said that the basic display mode of the effect symbol in the normal gaming state is the first display mode.

The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that are mainly displayed during the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state (while waiting for the customer waiting effect and during all variable effects) are numerical images (identifiers) of any one of 1 to 9. ) Is a single image, and the decorativeness is lower than the production design of the first display mode (simple design, few colors, dark colors, etc.) The production design of the second display mode (second production design) It has become.

The effect symbol in the second display mode is stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, but has the same shape (form) as the numerical image constituting the identification image SG in the effect symbol in the first display mode. Therefore, when the numerical image is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be used and displayed on the image display device 14. In this way, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

In the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state, the effect symbols of the second display mode are displayed as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the waiting for the customer waiting effect or during the execution period of all the variable effects. Since it is displayed, it can be said that the basic display mode of the effect symbol during the high-accuracy time-short game state or the low-accuracy time-short game state is the second display mode.

The special effect symbol TZ4 displayed in the normal game state, the high-accuracy time-short game state, and the low-accuracy time-short game state superimposes the hexagonal base image and the numerical image (identifier) of any one of 1 to 9. It is a composite image that is made to have a lower decorativeness than the production pattern of the first display mode, but is more decorative than the production pattern of the second display mode (complex design, many colors, bright colors, etc.). It is an effect symbol (third effect symbol) of three display modes.

The effect symbol in the third display mode is stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, but since it has the same shape (form) as the identification image SG in the effect symbol in the first display mode, the identification is performed. When the image SG is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be used and displayed on the image display device 14. In this way, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being compressed.

As described above, the types of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (basic display mode) mainly displayed in the normal game state (effect mode A), and the high-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode B) and the low-accuracy time-short game state. By differentiating the types (basic display modes) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 mainly displayed in (effect mode C), the effect displayed on the image display device 14 when there is a change in the gaming state. The display mode of the symbol can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special effect symbol TZ4 is produced in the third display mode in the normal game state (effect mode A), the high-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode B), and the low-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode C). Although it was designed to be displayed as a symbol (third effect symbol), the second display mode is as shown in the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the high-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode B) and the low-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode C). It may be displayed by the effect symbol (second effect symbol) of.

Further, in the normal game state (effect mode A), during the period when the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed as the effect symbols (second effect symbol) in the second display mode. However, it may be displayed by the effect symbol (third effect symbol) of the third display mode as in the special effect symbol TZ4.

Further, the basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal game state (effect mode A) is set as the first display mode, and in the high-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode B) and the low-accuracy time-short game state (effect mode C). Although the basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 was used as the second display mode,
The basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal game state is set to the third display mode, which is more decorative than the second display mode, and the basic display modes of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state. The display mode of may be the second display mode. In this case, it is preferable to display the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the second display mode from the transition effect in the variable effect executed in the normal gaming state to the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect.

Further, instead of notifying the result of the variable effect (variable display) by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the variable effect (variable display) is performed by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the three special effect symbols TZ4. The result of the above may be notified.

In addition, the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 when the variable effect (variable display) is completed are made to be the same, but in the case of a big hit, the effect symbols TZ1 to Make sure that the combination of TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 are the same, and that if there is a loss, the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may differ. May be good. In that case, the number of patterns in the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be larger or smaller than the number of patterns in the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3.

Although the change in the display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 when there is a change in the gaming state is not mentioned, here, a predetermined return condition (in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of times of variation display is executed). However, it may be replaced with winning a fall lottery, etc.), and a brief explanation of the case of returning to the normal gaming state from a specific gaming state such as a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state or a low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. I will do it.

When returning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined return condition, an effect image for shielding the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 (for example, a background image of the display unit 140) is displayed. A movable member (positioned in front of the effect symbol) for displaying the stage change image for switching, a dedicated effect image for switching only the effect symbol, and the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14. Along with the execution of a predetermined effect such as an effect of operating a member that can be converted into a state in which the image is displayed and a state in which the image is retracted from the front, the effect symbol of the second display mode that is shielded (visual recognition is restricted) is displayed in the first display. It is advisable to switch to the effect pattern of the mode. The predetermined effect may not be an effect that shields the effect pattern, but may be an effect that can attract the attention of the player.

(Direction flow of handshake event notice)
The production flow of the handshake event notice will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

First, the changing icon that is the target of the handshake event notice is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, and when the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is started, the changing icon is first displayed as the handshake event notice. A handshake event venue appears in the vicinity of the area 142, and a handshake character that shakes hands with the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon and an escort character that escorts the handshake character appear at a predetermined position on the display unit 140.

Then, when the handshake character and the changing icon shake hands and a predetermined line appears from the handshake character with the handshake, the color gradually starts to change from the bottom of the changing icon, and the color of the changing icon changes. An effect of whether or not the icon changes (whether or not the display mode of the changing icon changes) (hereinafter, referred to as "changing icon color change fanning effect") is executed. When the color changes completely (successful color change), so-called "promotion success (chance up)" occurs, and the expectation of winning a big hit for the changing icon rises, while the color change ends in the middle. When the color returns to the color before the color change fanning effect of the changing icon (color change fails), a so-called "promotion failure" occurs, and the jackpot winning expectation for the changing icon is maintained.

When the first changing icon color change fanning effect is completed, then the second dialogue appears from the handshake character again and the handshake event notice continues, and the escort character leaves the changing icon. And when the notice of the handshake event ends, it will be branched.

When the second dialogue appears from the handshake character again and the notice of the handshake event continues, the second changing icon color change fanning effect is executed. Then, as in the case of the first time, the icon color change during the second change is completely changed (color change is successful) and promotion is successful (chance up), or the color change is in the middle. It ends (color change fails) and promotion fails.

Then, when the second changing icon color change fanning effect is completed, the third dialogue appears from the handshake character again, and the handshake event notice continues, and the escort character leaves the changing icon. It will be branched when the guidance is given and the notice of the handshake event ends.

When the third dialogue appears from the handshake character and the notice of the handshake event continues, the third changing icon color change fanning effect is executed. Then, as in the case of the first and second times, the color of the icon during the third change is completely changed and the promotion is successful (chance up), or the color change ends in the middle. Promotion fails.

Then, when the third changing icon color change fanning effect is completed, the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake event notice continues, and the escort character gives an exit guide to the changing icon. It will be branched when the handshake event notice ends.

When the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the notice of the handshake event continues, in the fourth changing icon color change fanning production, the color always changes completely and promotion is successful (chance up). The escort character gives an exit guide to the changing icon, and the handshake event notice ends.

(Example of handshake event notice)
Next, an example of the production of the handshake event notice will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the hold icons A10 to A12 in the normal mode are displayed in the first display units 141a to the third display units 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, the loss is caused. It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol to be shown is performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) to 84 (c), the hold icons A10 to A12 displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c are in the changing icon display area 142, the first. Along with shifting to the display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon A10 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A10 becomes the changing icon A10.

Then, when the variable display of the effect symbol (variable display of the special symbol) is being executed, the game ball enters the first starting port 6, a new first special symbol hold occurs, and the first special symbol is held. The first start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the special figure hold, and it is determined that the handshake event notice is executed in the start opening prize processing, and the number of lines of the handshake event notice is twice. "4th special mode 21 at the time of winning → The color of the changing icon changes to green (4th special mode 12) in the first dialogue → The color of the changing icon in the second dialogue changes to red (4th) It is assumed that the icon display mode scenario for the handshake event notice of the effect content that changes to the special mode 13) is selected.

In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 85A, the hold icon A13 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the fourth special aspect 21. At this time, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A10 does not change, but the hold icons A11 and A12 corresponding to the advance hold for the newly generated first special figure hold are the fourth special. Along with the change to the aspect 41, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), the handshake event venue AK appears in the vicinity of the changing icon display area 142 while being partially hidden by the effect EF1.

By executing the handshake event notice based on the occurrence of the first special figure hold, the hold icon A13 is displayed in the fourth special aspect 21, and the hold icons A11 and A12 are displayed in the fourth special aspect 41. However, in order for the player to easily recognize the target of the handshake event notice, a heart is attached to the chest part of the silhouette of the person related to the hold icon A13, which is the target of the handshake event notice. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), when the effect EF1 is erased, the handshake character C1 that shakes the handshake related to the handshake event notice and the escort character C2 that escorts the handshake character C1 are sent to the handshake event venue AK. Appear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed, and the changing icon A10 is erased to correspond to the hold icon A11 as shown in FIG. 86 (b). When the variable display of the effect symbol to be performed is started, the hold icons A11 to A13 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A11 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 changes to the changing icon A11, and the display mode changes from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31 in accordance with the shift. Change.

Further, as soon as the changing icon A11 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, as shown in FIG. 86B, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A11 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Here, since the changing icon A11 is not the target of the suggestion of the jackpot winning expectation related to the handshake event notice, the dialogue does not appear from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the changing icon A11 also changes. do not.

As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 86 (c), the hold icon A13 of the fourth special aspect 21, the hold icon A12 of the fourth special aspect 41, and the changing icon A11 of the fourth special aspect 31 are displayed. In other words, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6 while the handshake event notice suggestion effect is being executed, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the entry is displayed in the normal mode. NS.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, the ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 by the end of the handshake event notice. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first starting port 6 or the like by the end of the handshake event notice. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

Just before the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A11 ends, the escort character C2 performs an operation of checking the clock as shown in FIG. 86 (d), and the variation display of the effect symbol ends. Suggest that. Then, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 during the change start to stop, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (b), the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation with respect to the changing icon A11. Then, the hand-shaking character C1 performs an action (bye-bye) to say goodbye to the changing icon A11, and the changing icon A11 is reduced as if leaving. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 are stopped and displayed, the changing icon A11 is completely erased, and the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 return to the standby state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the hold icon A13, which is the target of the handshake event notice, is shifted from the first display unit 141a to the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 11 is changed. When it becomes A13, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A13 and the handshake character C1 immediately shake hands.

As shown in FIG. 88A, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6 while the handshake event notice is being executed, the hold icon A15 corresponding to the entry is displayed in the normal mode. Will be done. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake event notice is to be executed, the ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 by the end of the handshake event notice. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first starting port 6 or the like by the end of the handshake event notice. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

When the changing icon A13 of the fourth special aspect 11 and the handshake character C1 are shaken, the first dialogue appears from the handshake character C1 as shown in FIG. 88 (b), and FIG. 88 (c) shows. As shown in the above, the changing icon color change fanning effect is executed in which the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, from white to green). Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 makes a guts pose and the color change (promotion) is successful. The translucent effect EF2 suggesting the success of the color change is visibly displayed on the changing icon A13.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the changing icon A13 continues to shake hands with the hand-shaking character C1 in the color (here, green) after the changing icon color change is changed by the first changing icon color change fanning effect. , As shown in FIG. 89 (b), the second dialogue appears from the handshake character C1, and the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, from green to red). A fanning effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 makes a guts pose again to change (promote) the color. Perform actions that suggest success.

Here, as shown in FIG. 90A, the reach state is established, the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation for the changing icon A13, and the handshake character C1 separates from the changing icon A13. When it is notified that the handshake event notice is over, a predetermined reach effect (for example, normal reach) is started, as shown in FIGS. 90 (b) to 90 (c). In addition, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are erased along with the execution of the transition effect (development effect) that develops into SP reach, and the display mode of the changing icon A13 displayed in the fourth special aspect 13 is the color at that time. The second special aspect 13 which is common to the red color is changed to the handshake event notice ends, and the SP reach production is started.

Further, at the timing when the transition effect is executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and moved to the upper right portion of the display unit 140, and are switched to the second display mode (second effect symbol), and after the end of the SP reach effect. It returns to the first display mode (first effect symbol) and returns to the position on the effective line of the display unit 140.

As described above, the color of the changing icon (in a broad sense, the display mode) gradually changes due to the handshake event notice, and the changing icon color fanning effect of whether or not the color changes is performed. By displaying the color change process in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the changing icon and easily recognize the change of the color of the changing icon.

In the present embodiment, it is the color that changes as the target of the handshake event notice, but the change target is not limited to the color, and may be the size or shape of the changing icon. Further, a plurality of elements constituting the display mode of the changing icon such as color, size, and shape can be appropriately combined to display the changing process. When multiple elements are combined appropriately, for example, the color changes when the first dialogue appears, the size changes when the second dialogue appears, and the shape changes when the third dialogue appears. It is also possible to change the elements that change according to the order of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice is given based on the preliminary judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure change of the special figure judgment information subject to the handshake event notice. It is also possible to perform this based on the pattern determination result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, but the execution timing of the handshake event notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the effect content of the variable effect. can do. Other execution timings of the handshake event notice include temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo-ream, step-up of the so-called step-up notice, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or super reach. It can be appropriately set when the development effect is executed, when the reach state is established, when the effect effect device 17 executes a predetermined operation effect, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event notice is given to the changing icon, but it can also be given to the hold icon. In this case, for example, the handshake event venue appears in the vicinity of any of the first display units 141a to the fourth display unit 141d, and is displayed on the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d where the handshake event venue appears. It is also possible to give a handshake event notice to the hold icon and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, it is the same as the method (steps S1305-19-14 to S1305-19-18, etc.) in which the production content of the handshake event notice is determined by the scenario determination of the icon display mode for the handshake event notice in the present embodiment. You can give a handshake event notice in any way.

Further, as another embodiment in which the handshake event notice is given, for example, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the handshake character shakes hands in order with respect to all or some of the icons displayed at that time. By doing so, it is possible to give a handshake event notice and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, for example, when the variation effect is started, it is possible to determine for which icon the handshake event notice is to be executed, and to determine the display mode after the change when the handshake event notice is executed. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, while the process of color change (change of display mode) of the icon is displayed, the icon and the hand-shaking character are shaking hands, in other words, the target icon of the color change. On the other hand, an action is executed, but some action is performed once or multiple times before the color change target icon changes color, and the color changes after the action ends (for example, a predetermined character is displayed on the target icon. The color of the target icon changes after the kiss is completed), and the color change can be made easier as the number of actions increases.

Further, in the present embodiment, 1 to 4 lines appear for one handshake event notice, and one changing icon color change fanning effect is executed with the appearance of one line. NS. Therefore, the greater the number of lines that appear in one handshake event notice, the higher the possibility of successful color change, in other words, the higher the chance of winning a big hit (increasing chance). By paying attention to the appearance of dialogue, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, in one handshake event notice, even if the color change fails due to a certain changing icon color change fanning effect, or even if the desired change is not achieved, when the next line appears, the player's color It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for change (increased expectation of winning a big hit).

In the present embodiment, one handshake event notice is executed in one variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol), but a plurality of handshake event notices are executed in one variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol). Can also be executed. Then, the number of lines of each handshake event notice of this multiple handshake event notice is decided by a scenario or an independent lottery, and the more the number of lines appearing in the multiple handshake event notices, the more successful the color change. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that the expectation of winning a big hit will increase (chance up).

In addition, the greater the number of lines, the higher the possibility of successful color change, which means that the time during which the handshake event is being shaken, in other words, the action is performed on the icon that is the target of the handshake event announcement. The longer the time spent, the higher the possibility of successful color change, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the handshake event notice is such that one or a plurality of lines appear while the handshake event is being shaken once, the number of lines is due to the time during which the handshake is performed. However, for example, it is possible to make the production content in which one or a plurality of words are uttered in one line so that the time of shaking hands changes depending on the length of the words in one line.

Further, in the present embodiment, 1 to 4 lines appear for one handshake event notice, and one changing icon color change fanning effect is executed with the appearance of one line. NS. Therefore, the greater the number of lines that appear in one handshake event notice, the higher the possibility of successful color change, in other words, the higher the chance of winning a big hit (increasing chance).

Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake event venue AK, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 that appear are set to one type, but a plurality of types are set for each, and the number of dialogues ( It is also possible to make the number of steps of the handshake event notice), the time of shaking hands (the production time of the handshake event notice), and the degree of expectation of successful color change different.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first dialogue content, the second dialogue content, the third dialogue content, and the fourth dialogue content in the handshake event notice are set to be different from each other, and the dialogue content of each time is set to be different. Is set to one type. Here, a plurality of types of dialogue contents are set for each time, and it is possible to make the expectation of success in color change different depending on the dialogue contents. It is also possible to set the dialogue content according to the type of handshake character. Further, the handshake character can be selected by the player by operating the selection button 19A and the effect button 18A during a preset period such as a waiting state for customers.

(Direction flow of throwing kiss notice)
The production flow of the throwing kiss notice will be described with reference to FIG. 91.

First, when the throwing kiss notice is started, a predetermined character first appears at a predetermined position on the display unit 140. In the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed with the start of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol.

The appearing character either performs a throwing kiss that shoots a heart toward any of the already displayed icons (holding icon or changing icon), or leaves without performing a throwing kiss and disappears from the display unit 140. When the character leaves and disappears from the display unit 140, the throwing kiss notice ends.

When a throwing kiss is performed by the character, a heart hits the icon targeted by the throwing kiss, and a predetermined effect is generated on the icon. Then, if the display mode of the icon changes after the effect disappears, the character performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode, and then disappears.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the icon has not changed after the effect disappears, the character performs an action according to the failure of the change in the display mode and then disappears.

(Example of production of throwing kiss notice)
Next, an example of the production of the handshake event notice will be described.

First, a state in which the throwing kiss notice is executed after the hold icon that is the target of the throwing kiss notice is changed to a special mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96. For example, as shown in FIG. 92A, the hold icon A21 in the normal mode is displayed in the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the hold icon A20 in the normal mode is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. It is assumed that the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is performed when it is displayed.

Then, a game ball enters the first starting port 6, a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is issued to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. It is assumed that the throwing kiss notice is determined to be executed in the start winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined in scenario 93.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 92B, the hold icon A22 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At the same time, the changing icon A20 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A21 to A22 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A21 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A21 changes to the changing icon A21. Further, the display mode of the hold icon A22 changes to the second special mode 13 (red) with the shift to the first display unit 141a.

Then, a game ball enters the first starting port 6, a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is issued to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. It is assumed that the throwing kiss notice is not executed in the start winning process.

In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 93A, the hold icon A23 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed. At the same time, the changing icon A21 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93B, when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A22 to A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively, to give a notice of throwing kiss. The character C3 appears and the changing icon change notice is started. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area, the hold icon A22 changes to the changing icon A22, and the display mode changes from the second special mode 13 (red) to the second special mode with the shift. It changes to 14 (zebra pattern).

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon to which the heart HT is skipped is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and here, toward the changing icon A20. It is assumed that the heart HT is skipped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the heart HT hits the changing icon A20, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A20, making the changing icon A20 difficult to see or invisible. (Not shown).

After that, when the predetermined effect is erased, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A22 changes from the second special mode 14 to the second special mode 15 (rainbow), and the “power” is displayed. A change notification image HG for notifying that the display mode of the icon has changed as "up 20%" is displayed in the vicinity of the changing icon A22, which is the target of the throwing kiss notice, and the display mode of the icon is displayed from the voice output device 15. A voice for notifying the change is output (for example, the voice of the character C3 is emitted as "power-up"), and the lighting effect device 16 performs the lighting effect in a manner dedicated to the change. In the present embodiment, the change notification image HG is composed of an image including the text "power-up", but the display mode is not limited to this, and can be appropriately set.

Then, the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode (in FIG. 94 (b), an operation of spreading both hands with a smile), and then is erased as shown in FIG. 94 (c). ..

Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described using another specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the hold icons A30 and A31 in the normal mode (white) are displayed in the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b of the first hold icon display area 141. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the hold icons A30 and A31 displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. At the same time, when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice appears. Since the hold icon A30 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A30 changes to the changing icon A30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Here, it is assumed that the heart HT is blown toward the changing icon A30.

Then, as shown in FIG. 96A, when the heart HT hits the changing icon A30, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A30, and the changing icon A30 becomes difficult to see or invisible. (Not shown).

After that, when the predetermined effect is erased, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A30 is changed to the second special mode 11 (white), and the voice output device 15 is concerned with the display mode. A voice notifying the change is output (for example, the voice of the character C3 emits "power-up"), and the effect lighting device 16 performs a lighting effect in a manner dedicated to the change.

Then, the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode, and then is erased as shown in FIG. 96 (c).

As described above, when the changing icon changes due to the throwing kiss notice, the change notification image HG is displayed by the image display device 14, the occurrence of "power-up" by the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16. Since it is notified that the changing icon has changed by the lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change, the player can easily recognize that the changing icon has changed.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the change notification image HG, the character C3 is notified that the changing icon has changed by performing a successful operation according to the change of the changing icon. In this way, since it is notified that the changing icon has changed depending on the shape and the character, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the changing icon has changed.

In the present embodiment, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16 notify that the changing icon has changed, and the notification is a part of these various effect devices ( For example, it may be performed by any one or two of the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16.

Further, in FIGS. 92 to 96, a specific example in which the throwing kiss notice is given to the changing icon has been described, but similarly, the throwing kiss notice and the display mode of the icon are changed for the hold icon. Notification is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed only when the shape of the icon does not change but the color of the icon changes, but the display mode also changes when the shape of the icon changes. It is also possible to notify the change of. As a result, the player can easily recognize the change in the icon display mode, and the decrease in the effect of the effect due to the change in the icon display mode can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, "power-up 20%" is displayed in the change notification image HG, but this "20%" portion is based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change. You can also make it selectable. It is also possible to change the color and size of the change notification image HG instead of the “20%” portion based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change.

Further, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be appropriately set. Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed for the change in the display mode of the icon performed through the action of throwing kiss by the character C3. For example, it can be performed even for a sudden change in the display mode of the icon when the icon is shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is performed based on the preliminary judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure change of the special figure judgment information that is the target of the throwing kiss notice. It is also possible to perform this based on the pattern determination result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, but the execution timing of the throwing kiss notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the effect content of the variable effect. can do. Other execution timings of the throwing kiss notice include temporary stop or re-variation of the pseudo-ream, step-up of the so-called step-up notice, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or SP reach production. When the development effect is executed, when the reach state is established, and a predetermined operation effect by the effect device 17 can be appropriately set.

Further, in the present embodiment, one heart is blown toward one icon by one throwing kiss notice, and a notice is given as to whether or not the display mode changes once for one icon. However, with one throwing kiss notice, multiple hearts are blown toward one icon at the same time or at predetermined time intervals, and a notice of whether the display mode changes multiple times for one icon. May be done. In this case, it is possible to notify the change of the icon display mode each time the icon display mode changes, and for one throwing kiss notice (after the last heart is skipped). ) It is also possible to collectively notify the change of the display mode of the icon at one time.

Further, one throwing kiss notice may cause a heart to be blown toward the plurality of icons to give a notice of whether or not the display mode changes for the plurality of icons. In this case, it is possible to notify the change of the display mode of the icon to all the icons whose display mode has changed, and to display the icon display mode for some of the icons whose display mode has changed. It is also possible to notify the change of.

(Overview of look-ahead zone production, zone fanning production, and zone precursor production)
The outline of the look-ahead zone effect, the zone fanning effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

The look-ahead zone effect is a notice effect that suggests the expectation of winning a big hit over one or more variable effects, and the zone fanning effect is a notice effect that incites whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed. A special symbol is used in the variable display and the stop display of the effect symbol. The zone precursor effect is a warning effect for suggesting or notifying the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode. In the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone fanning effect, and the zone precursor effect are executed in the variable effect in the effect mode A, and the look-ahead notice (continuous) is performed based on the pre-judgment result indicated by the start opening winning designation command. It is a kind of notice production).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97 (a-1), when the zone fanning success effect is executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the variation display of the next effect symbol is started. The look-ahead zone production starts from. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a-2), when the zone fanning failure effect is executed in the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol, the look-ahead zone starts from the start of the variable display of the next effect symbol. No production is performed.

Here, when the zone fanning success effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 97 (b-1), when the variable effect is performed, first "look ahead" is set as the left symbol of the left area of the display unit 140. The symbol stops, then the "zone" symbol stops as the right symbol in the right area of the display unit 140, suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, and finally "rushes in" as the middle symbol in the central area of the display unit 140. The symbol stops. In this way, when all the preset special symbols ("look-ahead" symbol, "zone" symbol, and "stop" symbol) are stopped, "special symbol alignment" is obtained, and the look-ahead zone effect can be executed. Be notified.

On the other hand, when the zone fanning failure effect 1 is executed as the zone fanning failure effect, as shown in FIG. 97 (b-2), when the variable effect is being performed, the "look-ahead" symbol is first set as the left symbol. Stops, then the "zone" symbol as the right symbol stops, and finally the "rush" symbol as the middle symbol tries to stop, suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect, but slips without stopping. The normal production symbol stops as a medium symbol. In this way, when only a part of the preset special symbols is stopped, "special symbols are not aligned", and it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

When a special symbol appears as a zone fanning effect, the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that have been displayed up to that point may be displayed in a reduced state in the upper right portion of the display unit 140, for example. For example, if a special symbol appears while the normal effect symbol is variablely displayed, the reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the display unit 140 with the appearance of the special symbol. Then, when the variation display is completed and the special symbol alignment or the special symbol alignment is performed, the same stop time as in the normal case (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) at the upper right portion of the display unit 140, The reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (effect symbols indicating loss) are stopped and displayed. Further, when the special symbol alignment or the special symbol non-alignment is completed and a new variable display is started, the special symbol is erased and the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed while returning to the original size. It moves to the normal position in the unit 140, and the variation display of the effect symbol as usual is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 (c-1) and 97 (c-2), the size change of the changing icon performed in association with the zone fanning effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the size of the changing icon increases according to the stop of the special symbol performed as the zone fanning effect.

In the zone fanning success production, the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step further according to the stop of the "zone" symbol, which is the second stage. Then, the size of the changing icon is further increased by one step according to the stop of the "rush" symbol, and it becomes the third step. When the zone fanning success effect is completed and the look-ahead zone effect is being executed, the changing icon is maintained at the size of the third stage.

On the other hand, in the zone fanning failure effect 1, the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step further according to the stop of the "zone" symbol. In the second stage, the size of the changing icon returns to the original normal size due to the sliding of the "rush" symbol.

In this way, by gradually increasing the size of the changing icon, which is easy for the player to pay attention to, it is possible to have a stronger sense of expectation for the look-ahead zone production.

(Examples of pre-reading zone production, zone precursor production, and zone fanning production)
Next, an example of the pre-reading zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone fanning effect will be described.

Here, when the number of 1st special figure hold is "2", a game ball enters the 1st start port 6, a new 1st special figure hold occurs, and the 1st special figure hold occurs. In response to this, the first start port winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start port winning process, the look-ahead zone effect scenario No. “4” shown in FIG. 41 and the precursor effect scenario “14” shown in FIG. 43 are finally obtained. An example of the effect when the icon display mode scenario “8” shown in FIG. 44 and -3 ”is selected will be described.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the hold icons A40 to A42 in the normal mode are displayed on the first display units 141a to 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect indicating a loss is shown. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved icon A40, the reserved icons A40 to A42 are changed to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, At the same time as shifting to the second display unit 141b, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon A40 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A40 changes to the changing icon A40.

Then, when the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is being executed, the game ball enters the first start port 6, a new first special figure hold occurs, and the first special figure hold is performed. The first start port winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of, and in the start port winning process, the look-ahead zone effect scenario No. “4” shown in FIG. -3 "is selected.

In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the hold icon A43 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the third special aspect 41, and is also shown in FIG. 98 (d). As described above, the hold icons A41 and A42 and the changing icon A40 corresponding to the advance hold for the newly generated first special figure hold change to the third special mode 41 (corresponding to the hold icon change notice).

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the variation display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 98 (b) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss, as shown in FIG. 99 (b). In addition, the changing icon A40 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), when the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A41 is started, each of the hold icons A41 to A43 is changed to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit. Along with shifting to 141a and the second display unit 141b, the display mode of the icon A43, which is the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect, changes to the third special mode 21 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2), and the read-ahead zone effect is not executed. The display mode of the icons A41 and A42 is changed to the third special mode 51 (look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2). Since the hold icon A41 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A41 becomes the changing icon A41.

Here, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6, the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), the hold icon related to the entry ( The zone effect non-target icon) A44 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A41 is the effect symbol two before the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon A43 which is the zone effect target icon. Since it is a variable display, the zone fanning effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol.

Here, since the zone fanning effect is determined to be a zone fanning success effect, as shown in FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (c), as the zone fanning effect, the "look-ahead" symbol, the "zone" symbol, Then, the "rush" symbols are temporarily stopped in order, and it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Here, the size of the changing icon A42 gradually increases according to the stop of the "look-ahead" symbol, the stop of the "zone" symbol, and the stop of the "rush" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the variable display of the effect symbols started in FIG. 99 (c) is completely stopped and displayed with the special symbols aligned, the changing icon A41 is erased. NS. It should be noted that, in correspondence with the stop display of each of the three special symbols, the normal effect symbol may be sequentially stopped and displayed in a state of being reduced to the position of the upper right portion of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. In this case, It will be a combination of production patterns that will be lost.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42 is started, the look-ahead zone background image HK indicating that the look-ahead zone is displayed is displayed, and the BGM and the illumination mode are displayed. The look-ahead zone effect (corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect) is started by switching from the effect mode A to the one dedicated to the look-ahead zone effect. That is, although the start time of the hold icon change notice and the continuous notice effect are different, the execution time is overlapped.

Further, each of the hold icons A42 to A44 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Here, since the hold icon A42 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A42 becomes the changing icon A42.

Further, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 31 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44, which are not the execution target of the look-ahead zone effect. The display mode of is changed to the third special mode 61 (look-ahead zone effect notification mode). Further, the size of the changing icon A42 continues to be the size of the third stage.

Here, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6, the icon is already displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the hold icon (zone) related to the entry. The effect non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same look-ahead zone effect notification mode 6.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the variable display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 101 (b) is stopped and displayed at the effect symbol indicating loss, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon A42 of the third special aspect 31 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the start opening winning designation command that generated the look-ahead zone effect is started, the hold icon Each of A43 to A45 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, and the look-ahead zone effect continues. Since the hold icon A43 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A43 changes to the changing icon A43.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped and the reach state is established in the variable display of the effect symbol, the display mode of the changing icon A43 changes to the third special mode 33. Then, the color of the main silhouette part turns red, and the look-ahead zone production continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the predetermined SP reach effect is developed, the hold icons A44 and A45 that have been displayed until immediately before that are hidden, and the display mode of the changing icon A43 is the third. It changes to the special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette part becomes a zebra pattern, and the look-ahead zone production ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the stop display of the effect symbols ("7" aligned) indicating the jackpot winning is performed, the silhouettes of the seven people related to the changing icon A43 are notified of the jackpot winning. Raise both hands to express joy.

As described above, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed, the zone precursor effect suggesting the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is set by changing the display mode of the icon to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode before the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Is done. Here, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode has a higher degree of expectation for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 (third special mode 1, third special mode 4) and the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1. A look-ahead zone effect suggestion aspect 2 (third special aspect 2, third special aspect 5) is provided. In the following, the zone precursor effect according to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 will be referred to as “zone precursor effect 1”, and the zone precursor effect according to the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 will be referred to as “zone precursor effect 2”.

The look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 1, and the characters “? Zone?” Are added as the icon display mode, and the number of silhouettes of people is composed of three people. In addition, the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2 is also an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 2, and the characters "△ zone △" are added as the icon display mode, and the number of silhouettes of people is composed of five people. There is. Therefore, the player sees the icons (holding icon and changing icon) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the look-ahead zone effect suggestion mode 2, and the zone suggesting that the look-ahead zone effect is executed. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the precursor effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect effect.

When the look-ahead zone is being executed, by changing the display mode of the icon to the look-ahead zone effect notification mode (third special aspect 3 and third special aspect 6), it is notified that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed. Zone notification effect is performed.

The look-ahead zone effect notification mode is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone notification effect, and the character "○ zone ○" is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people's silhouettes is composed of seven people. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the zone notification effect is being executed by looking at the icons (holding icon and changing icon) displayed in the look-ahead zone effect notification mode. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect.

In addition, zone precursor effects 1 and 2 and zone notification effects are provided as effects indicating the pre-reading zone execution expectation, and the look-ahead zone execution expectations indicated by each effect are zone precursor effects 1 <zone precursor effects 2 <zones. It is a notification effect. Since the icon display mode related to the zone precursor effect 1, the icon display mode related to the zone precursor effect 2, and the icon display mode related to the zone notification effect are different from each other, the player can easily determine the pre-reading zone execution expectation. Can be recognized.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of look-ahead zone effect, but it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of look-ahead zone effect with different jackpot winning expectations. In this case, a first look-ahead zone effect and a second look-ahead zone effect, which has a higher expectation of winning a jackpot than the first look-ahead zone effect, are provided, and the second look-ahead zone effect goes through the first look-ahead zone effect. It is also possible to make it execute from the first look-ahead zone effect in a developmental manner, or to execute it suddenly without going through the first look-ahead zone effect. Then, the type of the pre-reading zone effect to be executed can be suggested by the type of the zone precursor effect.

The icons according to the third special aspect are the same regardless of the type of the shape of the main silhouette portion, but the color of the main silhouette portion differs depending on the type, and the degree of expectation of winning a big hit differs depending on the color. In addition, the icon related to the third special aspect differs depending on the type of the number of people in the sub-silhouette part and the attached characters ("? Zone?", "△ zone △", "○ zone ○"). , The icon according to the third special aspect has different pre-reading execution expectations depending on the number of people in the sub-silhouette part and the attached characters.

Therefore, if the player pays attention to the display mode of the icon when the look-ahead zone suggestion effect and the look-ahead zone notification effect are being executed, the player can recognize the jackpot winning expectation in addition to the look-ahead zone execution expectation. Therefore, the fun of the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading execution expectation and the jackpot winning expectation are suggested by the elements constituting the third special aspects 1 to 6, but the suggested contents are not limited to this and may be set appropriately. can. For example, depending on the elements constituting the third special aspects 1 to 6, the degree of expectation that a specific effect such as SP reach, SPSP reach, or pseudo-ream is executed, or a specific type of jackpot such as probability variation jackpot or long hit is executed. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be achieved.

Further, the pre-reading execution expectation degree and the jackpot winning expectation degree are suggested or notified by the display mode of the icon, but these suggestions or notifications are not the display mode of the icon, but are, for example, the display mode of the effect symbol or the effect accessory. It can also be performed by other specific production modes such as the operation mode of the movable portion 17A of the device 17. Further, although the zone precursor effect is performed by the icon, it can also be performed by another image such as a background image or an effect pattern displayed on the display unit 140. Further, the zone precursor effect can be performed by using other effect devices such as the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, and the effect accessory device 17 instead of the image display device 14.

Further, the number of suggested contents is not limited to the embodiment, and can be appropriately set depending on the elements constituting the icon display mode. Further, as an element constituting the icon display mode suggesting a predetermined item, the shape, size, operation mode, etc. of the icon can be appropriately set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect are performed based on the preliminary determination result, but the special figure determination that is the target of the look-ahead zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect. It is also possible to perform the operation based on the jackpot determination result of the information, the special symbol determination result, or the special symbol variation pattern determination result.

Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, and the zone precursor effect and the zone notification effect are executed at the time of winning or the hold shift. Not limited to this, it can be appropriately set according to the effect content of the variable effect. Other execution timings of these effects include, for example, temporary stop or re-variation in a pseudo-ream, step-up of so-called step-up notice, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or development into super reach. When the development effect is executed, when the reach state is established, and a predetermined operation effect by the effect device 17 can be appropriately set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead zone effect is started, the zone fanning success effect is always executed before the start, but the effect symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) does not go through the zone fanning success effect. The look-ahead zone effect may be suddenly executed at the start or in the middle of (including the re-variation display in the effect).

(Example of continuous step-up notice production)
An example of the continuous step-up notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105.

Here, in the effect mode A (normal game state), when the continuous step-up advance notice effect scenario No. “14” shown in FIG. 46 (a) is finally selected in the start opening winning process corresponding to the hold icon A13. An example of the production of

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the hold icons A11 to A13 in the normal mode are displayed on the first display units 141a to the third display units 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect indicating a loss is shown. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A11 comes, the hold icons A11 to A13 are in the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the first. 2 At the same time as shifting to the display unit 141b, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed and the variation effect is started. Since the hold icon A11 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 becomes the changing icon A11.

At this time, the first step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the first effect position (movement width: small) located in front of the image display device 14. A plurality of LEDs provided inside emit blue light while performing the effect operation, and the blue effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

Then, when the effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the first step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, and the image The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), when the effect time of the variable effect elapses and the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon A11 that had been changing is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A12 comes, the hold icons A12 to A13 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a. At the same time, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon A12 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A12 changes to the changing icon A12.

At this time, the second step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the second effect position (movement width: medium) located in front of the image display device 14. A plurality of LEDs provided inside emit green light while performing the effect operation, and the green effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

Then, when the effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the second step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, and the image The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), when the effect time of the variable effect elapses and the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon A11 that had been changing is erased. When a game ball enters the first starting port 6 at this timing and a new first special figure hold occurs, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the first special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 141b. NS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (f), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved icon A13, which is the target of the continuous step-up notice effect, is reached, the reserved icons A13 to A14 are in the changing icon display area. 142, with the shift to the first display unit 141a, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon A13 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A13 changes to the changing icon A13.

At this time, the third step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the third effect position (movement width: large) located in front of the image display device 14. A plurality of LEDs provided inside emit red light while performing the effect operation, and the red effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

Then, when the effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the third step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, and the image The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also erased, and the continuous step-up notice effect ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105A, when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at the same symbol in the variable display of the effect symbol, the reach state is established and the normal reach effect is started. At this time, the variable display continues for the special special symbol TZ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the normal reach effect, a transition effect (development effect) suggesting the development to the SP / SPSP reach effect is started. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 move to the upper right portion of the display unit of the image display device 14 in a reduced state and change to the effect symbols of the second display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), when a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the start of the transition effect (development effect), the effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed. SP reach production is started. At this time, the variable display of the effect symbol TZ2 and the special effect symbol TZ4 continues.

As described above, the step effect is performed so as to step up to any one of the first to fourth steps over one or a plurality of variable displays by the continuous step-up notice effect, and the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. Since it is notified, it is possible to raise the expectations of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the effect period of the continuous step-up notice effect is the same in the first to fourth step effects, but the effect period of each step effect may be different. In that case, the first step effect <second step effect <third step effect <fourth step effect may be performed, or vice versa. Further, the effect period of any two or three step effects may be the same, and the effect periods of the remaining step effects may be different so as to be longer or shorter.

Further, instead of sequentially executing the first to fourth step effects, for example, the third step effect is executed after the first step effect, and the step effect is skipped by one step or a plurality of steps. The continuous step-up notice effect may be executed in the above mode. Further, when the final step effects are the same, it is preferable to set so that the expectation of the jackpot when the step skip is performed is higher than when the step skip is not performed.

Further, in the first to fourth step effects, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is moved to any of the first effect position to the third effect position, but it is the same in all the step effects. You may move to the production position.

(Example of production of chance eye notice production)
An example of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 106.

Here, in the effect mode A (normal game state), when the chance eye advance notice effect scenario No. “9” shown in FIG. 46B is finally selected in the start opening winning process corresponding to the hold icon A13. An example of production will be described.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the hold icons A11 to A13 in the normal mode are displayed on the first display units 141a to the third display units 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect indicating a loss is shown. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A11 comes, the hold icons A11 to A13 are changing the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the first. 2 At the same time as shifting to the display unit 141b, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed and the variation effect is started. Since the hold icon A11 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 becomes the changing icon A11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect and the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, the chance eye advance notice effect is started, and the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol are displayed. The blue-colored production symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of TZ3 and the production symbol TZ2, and a chance eye that is a combination of the production symbols of the same color is derived.

At this time, a white effect image EFG is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and when a predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the effect symbol, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 are stopped and displayed and fluctuate. The effect is completed, and the changing icon A11 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A12 comes, the hold icons A12 to A13 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a. At the same time, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed and the variable effect is started. Since the hold icon A12 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A12 changes to the changing icon A12.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (e), when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect and the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol TZ1, the effect symbol TZ3, and the effect symbol TZ2 are in that order. The green color effect symbol is temporarily stopped at, and the chance eye, which is a combination of the same color effect symbols, is derived.

At this time, a white effect image EFG is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and when a predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the effect symbol, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 are stopped and displayed and fluctuate. The effect is completed, and the changing icon A12 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is erased. When a game ball enters the first starting port 6 at this timing and a new first special figure hold occurs, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the first special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 141b. NS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved icon A13, which is the target of the chance eye notice effect, the reserved icons A13 to A14 are in the changing icon display area 142. , The first display unit 141a is shifted, and the variation display of the effect symbol is performed to start the variation effect. Since the hold icon A13 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A13 changes to the changing icon A13. Since the effect performed after this is the same as the effect example of FIG. 105 described above, the description here will be omitted.

As described above, the chance eyes of the same color are derived and displayed over one or more variable effects by the chance eye notice effect, or the chance eyes of different colors are stepped up and displayed as a big hit. Since the degree of expectation of the player is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by inspiring the player's expectation just before the end of the fluctuation effect.

In the present embodiment, the same color is used for the effect image displayed around the effect symbol when the chance eye is derived and displayed in the chance eye notice effect, regardless of which chance eye is derived and displayed. However, it may be changed according to the color of the production pattern that constitutes the chance eye.

In addition, instead of stepping up the order of the effect symbols that make up the chance eye in the order of the blue symbol, the green symbol, and the red symbol, the step skipping mode is such that the colors of the effect symbols that make up the chance eye are skipped one step. The chance eye notice effect may be executed. Further, when the colors of the final chance eyes are the same, it is preferable to set so that the expectation of the jackpot when the step skip is performed is higher than when the step skip is not performed.

In addition, in the chance eye notice effect that is executed over a plurality of variable effects, instead of executing the chance eye notice effect so that the colors of the effect symbols constituting the chance eye are stepped up, a plurality of types of chance eye notice effects are executed. May be randomly determined and displayed as a derivation. Further, although the chance eyes are composed of normal production symbols, the chance eyes may be composed of a combination of special production symbols, or the chance eyes may be composed of one or two dedicated production symbols. May be good.

(Example of production of dialogue notice production)
An example of the production of the dialogue notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 107.

Here, in the effect mode B (high-accuracy time-short game state), the dialogue notice effect scenario No. “7” shown in FIG. 48 (a) is finally selected in the start opening winning process corresponding to the hold icon B23, and FIG. An example of the effect when the icon final display mode “second special mode 21” shown in 52 is selected will be described.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the hold icons B21 to B22 in the normal mode are displayed on the first display unit 143a and the second display unit 143b of the second hold icon display area 143, and the dialogue notice is given on the third display unit 143c. When the hold icon B23 to be produced is displayed in the first special mode and the effect symbol indicating loss is stopped and displayed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B21 comes, the hold icons B21 to B23 are in the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 143a, and the first. 2 At the same time as shifting to the display unit 143b, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed and the variation effect is started. Since the hold icon B21 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B21 becomes the changing icon B21.

At this time, the first dialogue effect of the dialogue notice effect is started, the character C3 is displayed at the lower left side of the display unit of the image display device 14, and the dialogue (black characters) of "that?" Is displayed in the balloon, and the voice output device 15 is displayed. The voice of "that?" Is output from. Then, when the effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the first dialogue effect elapses, the characters and balloons displayed on the image display device 14 are erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), when the effect time of the variable effect elapses and the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon B21 that had been changing is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B22 comes, the hold icons B22 to B23 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 143a. At the same time, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon B22 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B22 becomes the changing icon B22.

At this time, the second dialogue effect of the dialogue notice effect is started, the character C3 is displayed at the lower left side of the display unit of the image display device 14, and the dialogue (black characters) of "maybe" is displayed in the balloon, and the voice output device 15 displays the dialogue. The voice of "Maybe" is output. Then, when the effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the second dialogue effect elapses, the character and the balloon displayed on the image display device 14 are erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), when the effect time of the variable effect elapses and the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon B22 that had been changing is deleted. When a game ball enters the second starting port 7 at this timing and a new second special figure hold occurs, the hold icon B24 corresponding to the second special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 143b. NS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved icon B23, which is the target of the dialogue notice, comes, the reserved icons B23 to B24 are in the changing icon display area 142, No. 1 At the same time as shifting to the display unit 143a, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon B23 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B23 changes to the changing icon B23.

At this time, the third dialogue effect of the dialogue notice effect is started, the character C3 is displayed at the lower left side of the display unit of the image display device 14, and the dialogue (red characters) of "hot!" Is displayed in the balloon and the voice output device. The voice of "hot!" Is output from 15. Further, it is notified that the display mode of the changing icon B23 has changed from the first special mode to the second special mode 21 and the occurrence of the effect equal to or higher than the SP reach effect has been confirmed. Then, when the effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the third dialogue effect elapses, the character and the balloon displayed on the image display device 14 are erased. Since the effect performed after this is the same as the effect example of FIG. 105 described above, the description here will be omitted.

As described above, it is expected that a big hit will be won by executing various dialogue effects over one or a plurality of fluctuation effects by the dialogue advance notice production and stepping up the color of the dialogue displayed on the image display device 14. Since the degree is notified, it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the expectation of the jackpot winning is suggested by the content and color of the dialogue displayed on the image display device 14 in the dialogue notice production, but the expectation of the jackpot winning is determined by either one. It may be notified.

In addition, when the dialogue notice effect is executed, the changing icon change notice is executed so that the display mode of the changing icon changes after the dialogue effect is executed in the variable effect that is the target of the dialogue notice effect. Is preferable. In this way, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the dialogue effect from diminishing due to the notice of the change of the icon during the change.

(Example of effect notice production)
An example of the effect notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 108.

Here, in the effect mode B (high-accuracy time-short game state), the effect notice effect scenario No. “11” shown in FIG. 48 (b) is finally selected in the start opening winning process corresponding to the hold icon B22, and FIG. An example of the effect when the icon final display mode “second special mode 22” shown in 52 is selected will be described.

As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the hold icon B21 in the normal mode is displayed in the first display unit 143a of the second hold icon display area 143, and the hold icon B22 to be the target of the effect notice effect is displayed in the second display unit 143b. If the effect symbol indicating loss is stopped and displayed while is displayed in the first special mode, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B21 comes, the hold icons B21 to B22 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 143a. At the same time, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed and the variable effect is started. Since the hold icon B21 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B21 becomes the changing icon B21.

At this time, the first effect effect of the effect notice effect is started, the variable display is started, and the blue effect image EFG is displayed around the oscillating effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the sound output device 15 starts. Sound effects (sound effects) are output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), when the effect period (for example, 1 second) of the effect effect elapses after the first effect effect is started, it is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. The effect image is erased, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start scrolling. When a game ball enters the second starting port 7 at this timing and a new second special figure hold occurs, the hold icon B23 corresponding to the second special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 143b. NS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), when the effect time of the variable effect elapses and the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon B21 that had been changing is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (e), when the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved icon B22, which is the target of the effect notice effect, is reached, the reserved icons B22 to B23 are in the changing icon display area 142. At the same time as shifting to the first display unit 143a, the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Since the hold icon B22 has been shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B22 becomes the changing icon B22.

At this time, the second effect effect of the effect notice effect is started, the variable display is started, and the green effect image EFG is displayed around the oscillating effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and the sound output device 15 starts. Sound effects (sound effects) are output. In addition, the display mode of the changing icon B22 changes from the first special mode to the second special mode 22, and it is notified that the heat is intense with a high expectation of a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (f), when the effect period (for example, 1 second) of the effect effect elapses after the start of the second effect effect, it is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. The effect image is erased, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start scrolling. Since the effect performed after this is the same as the effect example of FIG. 105 described above, the description here will be omitted.

As described above, the effect image is displayed around the effect symbol over one or more variable displays due to the effect notice effect, and the color of the displayed effect image is stepped up, so that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. Is notified, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by inspiring the player's expectation immediately after the start of the variable effect.

In this embodiment, the color of the effect image is set to 1 instead of stepping up the effect image displayed around the effect symbol in the effect notice effect in the order of the blue effect, the green effect, the red effect, and the rainbow effect. The effect notice effect may be executed in the mode of step skipping such as step skipping or a plurality of steps. Further, when the colors of the final effect images are the same, it is preferable to set so that the expectation of the jackpot when the step skipping is performed is higher than when the step skipping is not performed.

Further, in the effect notice effect, the effect image of the same color is not always executed so that the color of the effect image displayed around the effect pattern is stepped up over a plurality of variable effects. May be displayed.

Further, it is preferable to execute the changing icon change notice so that the display mode of the changing icon changes after the effect effect is executed in the variable effect that is the target of the effect notice effect. In this way, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the effect effect from diminishing due to the change notice of the changing icon.

(Time chart before and after the correct production and the customer waiting production)
A time chart before and after the correct effect and the customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

At the timing of T0, when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 and the start condition is satisfied, the image display device 14 starts the variation effect, and the normal variation effect period is set. In the device 16, the light emitting effect is started during the fluctuation.

At the timing of T1, the image display device 14 starts the normal reach effect to enter the normal reach effect period, and the effect lighting device 16 starts the variable light emitting effect corresponding to the normal reach effect.

At the timing of T2, the SP reach effect is started on the image display device 14 to enter the SP reach effect period, and the audio output device 15 outputs a one-shot notification sound constituting the correct effect, and the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device. At 33, the correct light emission effect constituting the correct effect is started.

At the timing of T3, the image display device 14 starts the result derivation effect for deriving the result of the SP reach effect to enter the result derivation effect period, and the effect accessory device 17 notifies that the result of the SP reach effect is a big hit. Perform a jackpot notification operation to do so.

At the timing of T4, when the variable effect that became a big hit ends, the lighting device 16 for the effect and the handle lighting device 33 end the accurate light emission effect, and the image display device 14 starts the big hit effect (opening effect) to produce the big hit. During the period, the effect lighting device 16 starts the big hit medium light emission effect.

At the timing of T5, when the jackpot effect period ends, the number of reserved 1st and 2nd special figures is "0", so that the waiting state for customers in which the variable effect and the jackpot effect are not executed is started and the customer is waiting. The effect waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, the customer waiting effect waiting screen is displayed on the image display device 14, and the waiting light emitting effect corresponding to the customer waiting effect waiting period is started on the effect lighting device 16.

It should be noted that the standby light emitting effect is a light emitting mode of the lamp / LED of the lighting device 16 for the effect rather than the above-mentioned fluctuating light emitting effect (especially during various reach effects), the jackpot medium light emitting effect, and the customer waiting light emitting effect described later. In detail, it is a light emitting effect with little movement blinking (moving lighting) and / or brightness change (including lighting / extinguishing).

When the customer waiting effect waiting period ends at the timing of T6, the customer waiting effect (demo effect) period (for example, 30 seconds) for executing the customer waiting effect is reached, and the image display device 14 is used to introduce the game machine. The customer waiting demo display (demo movie) is started, and the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33 start the customer waiting light emitting effect according to the customer waiting effect period.

It should be noted that the light emitting effect while waiting for customers is the at least one lighting device (the present embodiment) of a plurality of lighting devices (a plurality of game board lighting devices, a plurality of glass door lighting devices) constituting the effect lighting device 16. Then, in the glass door lighting device) and the handle lighting device 33, a pseudo-correct light emission effect having the same or similar light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) as the above-mentioned correct light emission effect is performed. In addition, when this pseudo-probable light emitting effect is executed, unlike the case where the above-mentioned accurate light emitting effect is executed, the one-shot notification sound is not output from the voice output device 15.

At the timing of T7, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect period, the pseudo-correct light emission effect executed by the one lighting device and the handle lighting device 33 ends and the other lighting is completed. The same light-emitting effect as the device while waiting for customers is started. It should be noted that the waiting-for-customer light-emitting effect is a light-emitting effect in which the light emitting mode of the lamp / LED of the effect lighting device 16 changes more than the above-mentioned waiting-for-light emitting effect, and it is easy to attract the attention of the player. ..

At the timing of T8, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect period ends, the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting effect waiting screen, and the effect lighting device 16 Then, the waiting light emitting effect corresponding to the customer waiting effect waiting period is started.

(Example of production of correct production)
Next, an example of the effect of the correct effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. Note that FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) and 111 (a) correspond to the timings of T0, T1 and T2 in FIG. 109, respectively, and FIG. 111 (b) is between T3 and T4 in FIG. 109. Corresponds to timing.

First, as shown in FIG. 110A, the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 executes a variable effect corresponding to the changing icon A43, and the lighting device 16 for effect has lamps / LEDs such as red and blue. The light emission pattern for the non-reach state, which is composed of the normal light emission colors of the above, is used to produce light emission during fluctuation. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, the symbol "7" is temporarily stopped in the left side region and the right side region, and the normal reach effect is executed. In No. 16, the lamp / LED emits light during fluctuation with a light emission pattern for normal reach composed of normal light emission colors (light emission modes) such as red and yellow. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111A, the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 displays the effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, and the SP reach effect is started. The correct effect is executed at this timing, and the changing icon of the second special aspect 15 in which the jackpot is confirmed as the correct display effect is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 of the display unit 140, and the audio output device. From 15, a one-shot notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" is output, and in the production lighting device 16 (specifically, the lighting device for glass doors) and the handle lighting device 33, the display colors of a plurality of lamps and LEDs are displayed with a time lag. By changing the color, the accurate light emission effect is started with the correct light emission pattern, which is a special light emission mode in which the light is emitted in rainbow colors.

As the correct display effect executed by the image display device 14, in addition to the display change to the second special aspect 15 in the above-mentioned icon change notice, the rainbow fanning (SU4) and the dialogue notice in the continuous SU notice effect Examples include "confirmed!" Lines in the production and rainbow effects in the effect preview production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region, respectively, and the special figure lottery result is notified (correctly). It corresponds to a kind of display effect). At this time, the output of the one-shot notification sound from the voice output device 15 is stopped, but the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33 continue to produce the correct light emission.

As described above, since the correct effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect, it is possible to fuel the player's expectation as to whether or not the correct effect is executed. The interest is improved. Further, in addition to the one-shot notification sound from the voice output device 15, the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33 execute the accurate light emission effect by a special light emission mode (rainbow color light emission) different from the normal light emission mode. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that it will be a big hit.

(Example of pseudo-correct light emission effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, an production example of the pseudo-correct light emission effect will be described. Note that FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) correspond to the timing between T4 and T5 and the timing between T6 and T7 in FIG. 109, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 displays the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG in a state where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as the customer waiting effect standby screen. In the effect lighting device 16, the lamp / LED performs a standby light emission effect in a light emission pattern for waiting for a customer waiting effect, which is composed of a normal light emitting color such as white or yellow. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 executes a demo display for waiting for customers, and the audio output device 15 outputs BGM and sound effects for waiting for customers. In the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect is executed in a special light emission pattern which is a special light emission mode in which the lamp / LED appears to emit light in rainbow colors. This pseudo-probable light-emitting effect is a light-emitting effect that has the same or similar light-emitting mode (emission color, light-emitting pattern, etc.) as the above-mentioned accurate light-emitting effect.

As described above, during the customer waiting effect period (during the customer waiting demo display), the pseudo-accurate light emitting effect that causes the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33 to emit light in the same or similar manner as the confirmed light emitting effect (determined light emitting effect) is performed. Since it is executed, it is possible to sufficiently attract the interest of the player (sufficiently increase the motivation to play) while waiting for customers.

(Modification example of the time chart before and after the correct production and the customer waiting production)
A modified example of the time chart before and after the correct effect and the customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In this modification, the pseudo-correct effect is not executed in synchronization with the start of the customer waiting effect (demo display for customer waiting), but is executed in the middle of the customer waiting effect (demo display for customer waiting). It is executed in synchronization with a predetermined display effect. Since the timings from T to T5 are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the customer waiting effect waiting period ends at the timing of T6, the customer waiting effect period (for example, 30 seconds) for executing the customer waiting effect is reached, and the image display device 14 starts the normal demo display for customer waiting. In the effect lighting device 16, the light emitting effect during customer waiting according to the customer waiting effect period is started. It should be noted that the light emitting effect while waiting for customers at this point is not a pseudo-probable light emitting effect, and the effect lighting device 16 emits light in a normal light emitting color (light emitting mode).

At the timing of T7, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the normal demo display for waiting for customers, the normal demo display executed in the image display device 14 simulates the SP reach effect in the variable effect. Switching to the special demo display for waiting for customers (the effect at the timing when the correct light emission effect is actually executed), the plurality of lighting devices (lighting device for game board, lighting device for glass door) constituting the lighting device 16 for production In at least a specific lighting device (lighting device for a glass door in the present embodiment) and a handle lighting device 33, the above-mentioned accurate light emitting effect and the light emitting mode (emission color, light emitting pattern, etc.) are the same or similar to each other. Is done.

At the timing of T8, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the pseudo-probable light emission effect, the pseudo-probable light emission effect executed by the specific lighting device and the handle lighting device 33 ends, and another lighting device is used. The same light-emitting effect while waiting for customers is resumed. It should be noted that the customer waiting light emitting effect is a light emitting effect in which the light emitting mode of the lamp / LED of the effect lighting device 16 changes more than the above-mentioned waiting light emitting effect.

At the timing of T9, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect period ends, the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting effect waiting screen, and the effect lighting device 16 Then, the waiting light emitting effect corresponding to the customer waiting effect waiting period is started.

(Example of pseudo-correct light emission effect in the modified example)
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, an production example of the pseudo-correct light emission effect in the modified example will be described. Note that FIGS. 114 (a) and 114 (b) correspond to the timings of T6 and T7 in FIG. 113, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 executes a normal demo display for waiting for customers, and the audio output device 15 outputs BGM and sound effects for waiting for customers. Therefore, in the effect lighting device 16, the lamp / LED emits light with a light emission pattern for customer waiting effect, which is composed of normal light emission colors such as white and yellow. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 114 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 displays a special demo for waiting for customers (here, an effect that simulates the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect that triggers the execution of the correct effect). (Display) is executed, and the BGM and sound effect of the customer waiting effect are output from the sound output device 15, and a plurality of lamps / LEDs emit rainbow colors in the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33. A pseudo-probable light emission effect is executed in a special light emission pattern, which is a special light emission mode that seems to be.

As described above, a special demo display in almost the same manner as the effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc.) that triggers the execution of the correct effect during the variable effect is executed during the customer waiting effect, and the special demo display is displayed. Since the pseudo-probable light emission effect is executed at the start of, it is possible to sufficiently attract the interest of the player (sufficiently increase the motivation to play) in the waiting state for customers. In addition, it will be possible to introduce the correct light emission effect during the variable effect, which makes it easier for the player to grasp the playability.

It should be noted that, instead of outputting the BGM and sound effects of the customer waiting effect from the audio output device 15 during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the BGM corresponding to the customer waiting demo display (normal demo display, special demo display) being executed. Or sound effects may be output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the handle lighting device 33, the lighting device for the glass door, which is one of the plurality of lighting devices constituting the lighting device 16 for the effect, executes the accurate light emission effect and the pseudo accurate light emission effect. However, instead of the lighting device for the glass door, the lighting device for the game board, which is one of the plurality of lighting devices constituting the lighting device 16 for the effect, may be used to perform the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo correct light emission effect. However, both the lighting device for the glass door and the lighting device for the game board may perform the correct light emission effect or the pseudo correct light emission effect.

Further, the correct light emission effect or the pseudo correct light emission effect may be executed by using only a part of the lighting devices among the plurality of lighting devices constituting the glass door lighting device and the game board lighting device. Further, the correct light emission effect or the pseudo correct light emission effect may be executed only by the handle lighting device 33, or the correct light emission effect or the pseudo correct light emission effect may be executed only by the effect lighting device 16.

Further, the accurate light emission effect and the pseudo correct light emission effect may not be executed by using the same number of lighting devices, but may be executed by using different numbers of lighting devices. In that case, a smaller number of lighting devices may be used for the pseudo-probable light emission effect than for the correct light emission effect, or a larger number of lighting devices may be used for the pseudo-probable light emission effect than for the correct light emission effect. .. In the latter case, it is easy to attract the attention of the players around.

Further, the pseudo-correct light emission effect may not be executed by the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33, but may be executed by only one of them. In that case, if the pseudo-correct light emission effect is executed by the effect lighting device 16 that is above the handle lighting device 33 and is conspicuous, the pseudo-correct light emission effect is performed without reducing the appealing power to the player while reducing the power consumption. It is possible to execute a light emission effect.

Further, a reflector for changing the illumination mode (irradiation direction) by a lamp / LED and a rotary motor for rotating (operating) the reflector are provided inside the handle lighting device 33, and the rotary motor is used in the accurate light emission effect. Although it is driven to operate the reflector, the reflector may not be operated without driving the rotary motor in the pseudo-correct light emitting effect. Further, the rotary motor may be driven to operate the reflector in the correct light emission effect and the pseudo correct light emission effect.

Further, the glass door Y2 and / or the game board 2 is provided with a dedicated effect device that emits light and / or operates during the execution of the correct effect, and the dedicated effect device is the same as the correct effect during the execution of the customer waiting effect. Alternatively, a pseudo-correct effect may be executed by performing similar light emission and / or operation.

In addition, in order to make the correct light emission effect and the pseudo correct light emission effect more conspicuous than the variable light emission effect, the brightness (illuminance) of the lamp / LED in the correct light emission effect and the pseudo correct light emission effect is changed to the variable light emission effect and the jackpot medium light emission effect. It may be higher than the brightness (illuminance).

Further, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect is not executed only once during the execution of one customer waiting effect on the image display device 14, but may be executed a plurality of times during the execution of one customer waiting effect. Alternatively, it may be executed during the customer waiting effect waiting period, which is before the start of the customer waiting effect, or may be executed during the customer waiting effect waiting period and during the customer waiting effect waiting period.

Further, since the execution time of the accurate light emission effect is from the start timing of the correct light emission effect in the variable effect to the end of the variable effect, the execution time value changes for each variable effect. Therefore, the execution time of the pseudo-probable light emission effect may be longer or shorter than the execution time of the pseudo-probable light emission effect. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the correct effect for notifying that the result of the variation display is a special result is executed before the result of the variation effect is displayed (derivated), but the result of the variation effect. The correct effect may be executed when is displayed, or the correct effect may be executed before the result of the variable effect is displayed and when the result of the variable display is displayed. In this case, one notification sound is output in the correct effect executed before the result of the variable effect is displayed, while one notification is output in the correct effect executed when the result of the variable effect is displayed. Sound may not be output or may be output at a low rate.

(Right-handed display when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 in the high-accuracy time-short game state)
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a display example of a right-handed display when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 of the left side region 2AL in the high-accuracy time-short game state.

In the effect image 1901 before the game ball enters the first starting port 6 of the left side region 2AL in the high-accuracy time-short game state, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), right-handed on the upper right side of the display unit 140. The display of the first right-handed image KMG1 is maintained as the specific notification image for notifying.

Here, the first right-handed image KMG1 is in a high-accuracy time-shortening game state or a low-accuracy time-shortening game based on the result of a special symbol lottery performed by entering the game ball into the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7. It is displayed on the display unit 140 when the game state is changed to the state or when the execution of the jackpot game (round game) is started.

Specifically, the first right-handed image KMG1 displayed during the high-accuracy time-short game state is an image obtained by the "first right-handed notification" based on the processes of steps S1700-3 to S1700-5 shown in FIG. It is incorporated in the image of the effect of the high-accuracy time-short game state executed by the control board 105, and when the game state is changed to the high-accuracy time-short game state, the display on the image display device 14 is started. Then, by the process of steps S1700-10 to S1700-12 shown in FIG. 80, the first right-handed image KMG1 is erased from the image display device 14 when the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state.

Further, the first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG in FIG. 82 (c)) displayed during the low-accuracy time-short game state is also based on the processes of steps S1700-3 to S1700-5 shown in FIG. By "first right-handed notification", it is incorporated into the image of the effect of the low-accuracy time-short game state executed by the image control board 105, and when the game state is changed to the low-accuracy time-short game state, the display on the image display device 14 is displayed. It will be started. Then, by the process of steps S1700-10 to S1700-12 shown in FIG. 80, the first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG) is erased from the image display device 14 when the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state.

Further, the first right-handed image KMG1 (OMG in FIG. 82 (d)) displayed during the round of the jackpot game is also "the first" based on the processes of steps S1700-3 to S1700-5 shown in FIG. "1 Right-handed notification" is incorporated into the image of the round effect of the jackpot game executed by the image control board 105, and the display on the image display device 14 is started at the start of the round effect. Then, by the process of steps S1700-10 to S1700-12 shown in FIG. 80, the first right-handed image KMG1 (OMG) is erased from the image display device 14 at the end of the round effect.

Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the opening is performed by the data output process of step S1900 based on the opening effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in the opening effect pattern determination process of step S1322. The image control board 105 that has received the effect pattern designation command executes the opening effect of the jackpot game. In the opening production of this jackpot game, in order to suggest the launch direction of the game ball in the jackpot game to the player, for example, the character image of "Aim at the right!" Is displayed in a large size on the image display device 14, and the game area. A "pre-right-handed display" is performed that suggests in advance that the game ball is launched toward the right area 2AR of 2A.

In the state shown in FIG. 115 (a), when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 of the left side region 2AL by two balls, the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 80 is performed in steps S1700-1 → S1700-2. → S1700-10 → S1700-13 → S1700-14 → S1700-15 → S1700-16 → S1700-17 → S1700-18 → S1700-19 → (omitted) → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a is in step S1700-17. In, the second right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the second right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 move to the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A. A "second right-handed notification" is performed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the player. The "second right-handed notification" includes a process for displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 on the image display device 14, and a process for outputting a sound requesting right-handedness by the voice output device 15. You may. By such processing, the effect image 1911 shown in FIG. 115 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.

In the effect image 1911 shown in FIG. 115 (b), in addition to the first right-handed image KMG1, the second right-handed image KMG2 is displayed in the center of the display unit 140 as a specific notification image for notifying the right-handed image. NS. The second right-handed image KMG2 is a horizontally long window KMG2a including a plurality of right-pointing arrows KMG2b and a character image KMG2c of "Caution! Right-handed".
Here, the voice output device 15 may make a voice announcement saying "Please hit right" at the timing of displaying the character image KMG2c saying "Caution! Please hit right".

The display on the display unit 140 of the second right-handed image KMG2 is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display.

Specifically, in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 80, the flow is step S1700-1 → S1700-6 → S1700-7 → S1700-8 → (omitted) → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a is in step S1700-7. In, the second right-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

As a result, the second right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 issue "second right-handed notification". It will be terminated.

In the high-accuracy time-short game state, when the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the customer waiting state designation command, the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 80 is performed in steps S1700-1 → S1700-2. → S1700-10 → S1700-13 → S1700-14 → S1700-15 → S1700-16 → S1700-21 → S1700-22 → S1700-19 → (omitted) → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a is in step S1700-21. In, the third right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 move to the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A. A "third right-handed notification" is performed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the player. The "third right-handed notification" includes a process for displaying the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14, and a process for outputting a sound requesting right-handedness by the voice output device 15. You may.

Due to such processing, although not shown, the image display device 14 has a right-handed display in the center of the display unit 140 in the same display mode as the second right-handed image KMG2 shown in FIG. 115 (b). The third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed in large size as the specific notification image to be notified.

Further, FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a display example of a right-handed display when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 in the high-accuracy time-shortening game state, but during the execution of the jackpot game or in the low-accuracy time-saving game. Even during the gaming state of the gaming state, as shown in FIG. 115, the "first right-handed notification", the "second right-handed notification", and the "third right-handed notification" are displayed in the same manner. good.

(Left-handed display when changing from the probabilistic game state to the normal game state)
FIG. 116 shows a probabilistic game state in which the game progresses by firing the game ball toward the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A, and then launches the game ball toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. It is a figure which shows the display example of the left-handed display for urging the player to launch a game ball toward the left side area 2AL when it changes to the normal game state in which a game progresses by making it.

Here, in the present embodiment, based on the importance and urgency of the "left-handed" display, the priority regarding the display is set in relation to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 already displayed on the image display device 14. , The "left-handed" display is to be preferentially superimposed on other display contents and displayed, which will be described below.

In the effect image 1001 of the final variation display of the effect symbol in the probability change game state, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the remaining 0 characters are displayed in the probability change remaining number image KKG, which is the display mode for the probability change. After that, when the variation display is completed, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed side by side in the central portion of the display unit 140, and the effect is on the lower right side of the display unit 140. Between the symbol TZ3 and the second hold icon display area 143, three special effect symbols TZ4 are stopped and displayed side by side.

When the gaming state is changed from this state to the normal gaming state, the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81 becomes a flow of steps S1800-1 → S1800-2 → S1800-3 → S1800-4 → S1800-5 → RETURN. , The sub CPU 102a sets the first left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1800-3. As a result, the first left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 move to the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "first left-handed notification" is performed to encourage the player to shoot a game ball toward the player. By this "first left-handed notification", the effect image 1011 shown in FIG. 116 (c) is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the "first left-handed notification" includes, in addition to displaying the first left-handed image 1612 on the image display device 14, a process for causing the sound output device 15 to output a sound prompting left-handed. It may be.

In the effect image 1011 the first left-handed image 1612 included in the above-mentioned "first left-handed notification" is displayed at the lower part of the display unit 140 on top of the effect image during the change of the effect symbol in the normal game state. The first left-handed image 1612 is composed of a horizontally long first window 1613 and a second window 1614. The first window 1613 includes a plurality of left-pointing arrows 1615, and the second window 1614 "left-handed". The text image 1616 of "Please return to" is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is hold display> first left-handed image 1612, and the hold display is displayed on the first left-handed image 1612.

Further, in the effect image 1011 although the first left-handed image 1612 extends in the lateral direction of the image display device 14 and is superimposed on the hold display, "Please return to left-handed". The character image 1616 is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display while waiting for customers)
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right side region 2AR during the customer waiting state in the normal game state.

In the customer waiting state, when the game ball has not passed through the winning gate 10 of the right side region 2AR, the customer waiting state image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The state is maintained.

In the customer waiting state image 1101, the effect symbols (first effect symbols) "1", "4", and "9" of the three first display modes showing loss as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the special effect is displayed. As the symbol TZ4, the effect symbols (third effect symbol) "1", "4", and "9" of the three third display modes corresponding to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed. No icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 141 and the changing icon display area 142. On the upper left side of the display unit 140, an image showing a normal effect mode A indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous for the player, which is set corresponding to the normal gaming state which is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. AMG is displayed.

When the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right side region 2AR from this state, the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81 is performed in steps S1800-1 → S1800-2 → S1800-9 → S1800-12 → S1800-13 → S1800. In the flow of -14 → S1800-15 → S1800-5 → RETURN, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1800-14. As a result, the second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 move to the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "second left-handed notification" is performed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the player. By this "second left-handed notification", the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting state image 1111 shown in FIG. 117 (b).
Here, the "second left-handed notification" includes, in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 on the image display device 14, a process for causing the sound output device 15 to output a sound prompting left-handed. It may be.

In the customer waiting state image 1111 shown in FIG. 117 (b), the above-mentioned "second left-handed notification" is displayed at the lower part of the display unit 140 so as to be superimposed on the customer waiting state image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a). The included second left-handed image 1622 is displayed. The second left-handed image 1622 is composed of a horizontally long first window 1623 and a second window 1624. The first window 1623 includes a plurality of leftward arrows 1625, and the second window 1624 is "left-handed". The text image 1626 of "Please return to" is included.

Further, in the image 1111 in the waiting state for customers, although the second left-handed image 1622 extends in the lateral direction of the image display device 14 and is superimposed on the hold display, "return to left-handed". The character image 1626 of "Please" is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display while the production symbol in the normal game state is changing)
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right side region 2AR while the effect symbol changes in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the effect image 1201 during the change of the effect symbol in the normal game state, the changing icon A01 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. Along with this, the special effect symbol TZ4 is also displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower center of the display unit 140, an image 1701 of a notice effect by a mini character is displayed. Then, an image AMG showing the normal effect mode A is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140.

When the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 from the state in which the effect symbol of the normal game state shown in FIG. 118 (a) is changing, in the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81, step S1800-1 → step S1800-2. → Step S1800-9 → Step S1800-12 → Step S1800-13 → Step S1800-16 → Step S1800-17 → Step S1800-5 → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a transmits the sub RAM 102c in step S1800-16. Set the 3rd left-handed display start command in the buffer. As a result, the third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 move to the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "third left-handed notification" is performed to encourage the player to shoot a game ball toward the player. By this "third left-handed notification", the effect image 1211 shown in FIG. 118 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the "third left-handed notification" includes, in addition to displaying the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14, a process for causing the voice output device 15 to output a sound prompting left-handed. It may be.

In the effect image 1211, the third effect image 1201 in the normal gaming state, which is shown in FIG. 118 (a), is superimposed on the effect image 1201 and is included in the above-mentioned "third left-handed notification" at the lower part of the display unit 140. The left-handed image 1632 is displayed. The third left-handed image 1632 is composed of a horizontally long first window 1633 and a second window 1634. The first window 1633 includes a plurality of left-pointing arrows 1635, and the second window 1634 “left-handed”. The text image 1636 of "Please return to" is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is hold display> third left-handed image 1632> advance notice effect image 1701, and the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the advance notice effect image 1701. A hold display is displayed above the left-handed image 1632.

Further, in the effect image 1211, although the third left-handed image 1632 extends in the horizontal direction of the image display device 14 and is superimposed on the hold display, "Please return to left-handed". The character image 1636 is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display during menu display while waiting for customers)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right region 2AR during the menu display in the customer waiting state.

First, when the effect button 18A is operated in the customer waiting state in which the menu is not displayed, the customer waiting display control process of FIG. 79 is performed in steps S1400-1 → S1400-5 → S1400-6 → S1400-7. → S1400-8 → S1400-9 → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a displays a menu image that enables menu operation by superimposing it on the screen such as the customer waiting state image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Perform the processing to be performed. As a result, the menu display image 1501 shown in FIG. 119 (a) is displayed so as to be superimposed.

In the menu display image 1501, the text image 1502 of "Please select a menu with the cross key" is on the upper part of the display unit 140, and each image of the selection items 1503, 1504, 1505, 1506 is on the left side of the display unit 140. 1507, the character image 1508 on the right side of the display unit 140, the image 1509 showing the selection button device at the bottom of the display unit 140, the character image 1510 of "selection", the image 1511 showing the effect button device, the characters of "setting". Image 1512 is displayed.

Here, each function of each image 1503, 1504, 1505, 1506, 1507 of the selection item shown as an example of the menu display in FIG. 119 will be described.
As shown in the display of "Pachilog", the image 1503 of the selection item is an item for recording the game history by the operation of reading the QR code (registered trademark) in conjunction with the mobile terminal such as a smartphone. The image 1504 of the selection item is an item for changing, for example, the BGM flowing during the normal gaming state, the background image of the liquid crystal screen, and the like, as displayed as "customize the actual machine". As shown in the display of "character selection", the image 1505 of the selection item is displayed on the image display device 14 during a game such as a specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state) or a jackpot game. This item allows you to select the main character to be displayed. The image 1506 of the selection item is an item for explaining the operation of the gaming machine for beginners of the operation of the gaming machine, as displayed as "Pachinko course". Further, as for the image 1507 of the selection item, the menu display can be terminated by selecting the image 1507 as indicated by "Return".

When the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right side region 2AR from the state where the menu display shown in FIG. 119 (a) is being performed, the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81 is performed in steps S1800-1 → S1800-2. → S1800-9 → S1800-12 → S1800-13 → S1800-14 → S1800-15 → S1800-5 → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a hits the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c with the second left in step S1800-14. Set the display start command. As a result, the second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 move to the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "second left-handed notification" is performed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the player. By this "second left-handed notification", the menu display image 1520 shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the "second left-handed notification" includes, in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1652 on the image display device 14, a process for causing the sound output device 15 to output a sound prompting left-handed. It may be.

In the menu display image 1520, the second left-handed image 1652 included in the above-mentioned "second left-handed notification" is displayed at the lower part of the display unit 140 on top of the menu display image 1501 shown in FIG. 119 (a). NS. The second left-handed image 1652 is composed of a horizontally long first window 1653 and a second window 1654. The first window 1653 includes a plurality of leftward arrows 1655, and the second window 1654 is "left-handed". The text image 1656 of "Please return to" is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is 2nd left-handed image 1652> image 1509 to 1512, and the 2nd left-handed image 1652 is displayed on the images 1509 to 1512.

(First Modified Example of First Embodiment)
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a left-handed display in the first modification of the first embodiment.
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 while the effect symbol changes in the normal game state, as in FIG. 118.

As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the effect image 1301 in which the effect symbol is changing in the normal game state, the image 1701 of the advance notice effect by the mini character is displayed at a position closer to the upper right of the display unit 140, and the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed. Other than that it is displayed on the upper left side of the unit 140, the other display contents are the same as those of the effect image 1201 shown in FIG. 118 (a).

When the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 from this state, the third left-handed display command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. A "third left-handed notification" is performed, which prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. By this "third left-handed notification", a process for displaying the third left-handed image 1642 is performed, and the effect image 1311 shown in FIG. 120 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.

In the effect image 1311, the third left-handed image 1642 is displayed on the upper part of the display unit 140 so as to be superimposed on the effect image 1301 during the effect symbol change in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 120 (a). The third left-handed image 1642 is composed of a horizontally long first window 1644 and a second window 1644. The first window 1643 includes a plurality of left-pointing arrows 1645, and the second window 1644 is "left-handed". The text image 1646 of "Please return to" is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is the special effect symbol TZ4> the third left-handed image 1642> the notice effect image 1701, and the third left-handed image 1642 is displayed on the advance notice image 1701. The special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed on the third left-handed image 1642.

Further, in the effect image 1311, although the third left-handed image 1642 extends in the lateral direction of the image display device 14 and is superimposed on the special effect symbol TZ4, "Please return to the left-handed image." The character image 1646 of "" is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the special effect symbol TZ4.

(Second modification of the first embodiment)
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a left-handed display in the second modification of the first embodiment.
The effect image 1411 shown in FIG. 121 is an example of displaying the third left-handed image 1812 included in the “third left-handed notification” when the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 during the effect symbol change in the normal game state. Is shown.

In the effect image 1411, the third left-handed image 1812 is displayed so as to overlap the area on which the effect symbol TZ1 is displayed on the left side of the image display device 14. The third left-handed image 1812 is a display mode in which a vertically long window 1813 includes an arrow 1814 in the left direction and a character image 1815 of "Please return to left-handed".

Here, in the second modification of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the priority order of the image display is set to the third left-handed image 1812> the effect symbol TZ1, and the third left-handed image 1812 has the effect symbol. The area where TZ1 is displayed is overlapped and displayed preferentially. However, the method is not limited to the method of setting the priority of the third left-handed image 1812 with respect to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 to be high and superimposing the display on the effect symbols TZ1, and displaying the images by superimposing them on the other effect symbols TZ2 to TZ4. Further, the size of the third left-handed image 1812 may be greatly enlarged to hide the plurality of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 by superimposing the display on the plurality of effect symbols TZ1 and TZ2. It may be superimposed and displayed.

That is, in the second modification of the first embodiment, the third left-handed image 1812 is not superimposed on all the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 to cover them, and at least among the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4. The third left-handed image 1812 is preferentially displayed for the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 so as not to hide one effect symbol.

As described above, in the first modification and the second modification of the first embodiment, the "left-handed" display is prioritized in terms of display in relation to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 already displayed on the image display device 14. Therefore, even if the player is paying attention to the images of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 and the notice effect by the mini character, the player can easily recognize the "left-handed" display immediately, so that the player can easily recognize the "left-handed" display. It is possible to suppress the launch of the game ball into the disadvantageous game area.

Further, in the first embodiment, in order to preferentially show the player a more effective effect while the "left-handed" display is being performed on the image display device 14, the "left-handed" display is more than the "left-handed" display. The "left-handed" display may be hidden for the effect using the light guide plate (not shown) having a higher priority and the effect using the effect device 17.

Note that warning notifications that require immediate countermeasures, such as "ball removal notification" and "magnet error" that should be urgently notified to the player during the game, are referred to as "left-handed" display on the image display device 14. Simultaneous display may be possible so as not to hide the "left-handed" display without superimposing.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the above-described first embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 80, once in a state where the game ball should be launched toward the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A (during a big hit game or during a time saving). The second right-handed image KMG2 displayed on the image display device 14 is to be terminated on condition that a predetermined display time (second right-handed display time) has elapsed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 while the second right-handed image KMG2 displayed on the image display device 14 is being displayed, or the fourth general The display of the second right-handed image KMG2 is terminated on condition that the ball enters the winning opening, and will be described below.

◇ (Right-handed display control process 2 in the second embodiment)
The right-handed display control process by the effect control board 102 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122.

Here, since steps S1701-1 to S1701-5 and steps S1701-8 are the same as the processes in steps S1700-1 to step S1700-5 and step S1700-9 in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted. do.

In step S1701-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1701-9, and when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the winning gate 10, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1701-7.

In step S1701-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the fourth general winning opening entry ball designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered the 4th general winning opening 11-4, the process shifts to step S1701-9, and determines that the game ball has not entered the 4th general winning opening 11-4. Then, the process is transferred to step S1701-8.

In step S1701-9, the sub CPU 102a instructs the end of the "second right-handed notification" including the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the "third right-handed notification" including the display of the third right-handed image KMG3. Therefore, the second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process is transferred to step S1701-10. The second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and is transmitted by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to "the second right-handed display end command". "2 Right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" will be terminated.

In step S1701-10, the sub CPU 102a has the second right-handed display flag “02R” in the second right-handed display flag storage area of the subRAM 102c or the third right-handed display flag “03R” in the third right-handed display flag storage area. Is cleared, and the process is moved to step S1701-2.

The subsequent processes, steps S1701-1 to S1701-23, are the same as the processes in steps S1700-10 to S1700-22 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, the "second right-handed notification" or the "third right-handed notification" is detected until the passing of the game ball at the winning gate 10 or the entry of the ball into the fourth general winning opening is detected. Is maintained, the effectiveness of displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 can be enhanced.

In the second embodiment, when it is detected that one ball of the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 or one ball of the game ball enters the fourth general winning opening, the second right Although the display of the hit image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is to be terminated, the passage of a predetermined number of game balls is detected at the winning gate 10, or a predetermined number of game balls are detected at the fourth general winning opening. The display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 may be terminated on condition that the entry of the ball is detected.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the passage at the winning gate 10 or the entry into the fourth general winning opening is detected, the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is terminated. However, when the ball entering the second starting port 7 is detected, the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 may be terminated.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 81, the image display device 14 is once in a state where the game ball should be launched toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A (during the normal game state). The displayed first left-handed image 1612, second left-handed image 1622, and third left-handed image 1632 are to be terminated on condition that a predetermined display time (left-handed display time) has elapsed. ..
On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the game ball is displayed while the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 displayed on the image display device 14 are displayed. Ends the display on condition that the ball enters the first starting port 6 or enters the first to third general winning openings, and will be described below.

(2) (Left-handed display control process 2 in the third embodiment)
The left-handed display control process by the effect control board 102 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

Here, since steps S1801-1 to S1801-4 are the same as the processes of steps S1800-1 to S1800-4 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the third embodiment, since it is not necessary to set the display time of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632, the step S1800-5 in the first embodiment is performed. It is decided not to perform the corresponding processing.

In step S1801-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered the first starting port 6, the process shifts to step S1801-7, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 6, step S1801- Move the process to 6.

In step S1801-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered any of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3. judge. Specifically, the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first general winning opening entry ball designation command, the second general winning opening entry ball designation command, or the third general winning opening entry ball designation command. Determine if it exists. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered any of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3, the sub CPU 102a processes in step S1801-7. When it is determined that no game ball has entered any of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3, the left-handed display control process is performed. To finish.

In step S1801-7, the sub CPU 102a issues the first left-handed display end command when the first left-handed display flag “01L” in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c is set. Left-handed display flag When the second left-handed display flag "02L" in the storage area is set, the second left-handed display end command is issued, and the third left-handed display flag "03L" in the third left-handed display flag storage area is issued. Is set, the third left-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process is transferred to step S1801-8.

In step S1801-8, the sub CPU 102a terminates the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632. Clear the first left-handed display flag "01L", the second left-handed display flag "02L" in the second left-handed display flag storage area, and the third left-handed display flag "03L" in the third left-handed display flag storage area. ..

Since steps S1801-9 to S1801-17 are the same as the processes of steps S1800-9 to S1800-17 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the third embodiment, the first left-handed image 1612, until the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6 or the entry into the first to third general winning openings is detected. Since the display of the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 is maintained, the effectiveness of these displays can be enhanced.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 81, in a state where the game ball should be launched toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A (normal game state), one ball is provided at the winning gate 10. When it is detected that the game ball has passed, the "second left-handed notification" or the "third left-handed notification" is to be performed.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when it is detected that three game balls have passed at the winning gate 10 in the same game state (normal game state), "second left-handed strike" is performed. "Notification" or "third left-handed notification" is to be performed, and thereafter, unless a ball entering the first starting port 6 is detected, every time one game ball passes at the winning gate 10, the "third ball" is performed. 2 Left-handed notification or "third left-handed notification" is to be performed, and will be described below.

(5) (Left-handed display control process 3 in the fourth embodiment)
The left-handed display control process by the effect control board 102 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124.

Here, since steps S1802-1 to S1802-5 are the same as the processes of steps S1800-1 to S1800-5 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S1802-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1802-7, and when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the winning gate 10, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1802-12.

In step S1802-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not three game balls have already passed at the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning gate 3 ball passing flag "03G" is set in the winning gate 3 ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the winning gate 3 ball passing flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1802-15, and when it determines that the winning gate 3 ball passing flag has not been set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1802-8.

In step S1802-8, the sub CPU 102a adds "1" to the counter value of the winning gate passing number counter S to update the counter value, and shifts the process to step S1802-9.

In step S1802-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the winning gate passing number counter S is 3 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 3 or more, the left-handed display control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value of the winning gate passing number counter S is 3 or more, the process is performed in step S1802-10. Transfer.

In step S1802-10, the sub CPU 102a sets the winning gate 3 ball passing flag “03G” in the winning gate 3 ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1802-11, the sub CPU 102a clears the counter value of the winning gate passing number counter S, and shifts the process to step S1802-15.

In step S1802-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered the first starting port 6, the process shifts to step S1802-13, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 6, the sub CPU 102a strikes the ball to the left. End the display control process.

In step S1802-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not three game balls have already passed at the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning gate 3 ball passing flag "03G" is set in the winning gate 3 ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the winning gate 3 ball passing flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1802-14, and when it determines that the winning gate 3 ball passing flag has not been set, the sub CPU 102a ends the left-handed display control process. ..

In step S1802-14, the sub CPU 102a clears the winning gate 3 ball passing flag “03G” stored in the winning gate 3 ball passing storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the left-handed display control process.

In step S1802-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the customer is currently waiting for a customer. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the customer waiting state, it shifts the process to step S1802-16, and when it determines that it is not in the customer waiting state, it shifts the process to step S1802-18.

In step S1802-16, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c and shifts the process to step S1802-17 in order to instruct the start of the display of the second left-handed image 1622. .. The second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the second left-handed image 1622 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "second left-handed notification" will be executed.

In step S1802-17, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display flag “02L” in the second left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1802-5.

In step S1802-18, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently in progress, the high probability time / short game state is in progress, or the low probability time / short game state is in progress. Specifically, whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a round designation command, and in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode flag is stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not "01H" to "04H" are set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the jackpot game is not in progress or the time is shortened, that is, if it is determined that the symbol is changing in the normal game state, the process is transferred to step S1802-19, and if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress or the time is shortened, the present invention is determined. The left-handed display control process ends.

In step S1802-19, the sub CPU 102a sets a third left-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the third left-handed image 1632 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1802-20. .. The third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the third left-handed image 1632 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "third left-handed notification" will be executed.

In step S1802-20, the sub CPU 102a sets the third left-handed display flag “03L” in the third left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1802-5.

Hereinafter, since steps S1802-21 to step S1802-23 are the same as the processes of steps S1800-6 to S1800-8 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125, the relationship between the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 and the control related to the left-handed display in the fourth embodiment will be described.

When three game balls pass through the winning gate 10 in the game state (normal game state) in which the game balls are launched toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A, the sub CPU 102a displays the left-handed display shown in FIG. 124. In the control process, the process is performed in the order of step S1802-6 → step S1802-7 → step S1802-8 → step S1802-9 → step S1802-10, and thereafter, in steps S1802-15 to step S1802-20. Based on the process, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the subRAM 102c.
Further, in step S1802-10, in order to remember that the game balls for three balls have passed through the winning gate 10, the winning gate three-ball passing flag " 03G "is set.

As a result, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and is transmitted by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. A "second left-handed notification" or a "third left-handed notification" that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A is performed. By this "second left-handed notification" or "third left-handed notification", the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, in the "second left-handed notification" and "third left-handed notification", in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14, the audio output device 15 May include a process for outputting a sound prompting left-handedness.

In this state, when one game ball passes through the winning gate 10, in the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 124, the process is performed in the flow of step S1802-6 → step S1802-7 → step S1802-15. Then, based on the process of step S1802-15 to step S1802-20, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

Therefore, every time one game ball passes through the winning gate 10, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is sent to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board in the data output process of step S1900. A "second left-handed notification" or a "third left-handed notification" is transmitted to the 105 and prompts the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to launch the game ball toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. Will be done. By this "second left-handed notification" or "third left-handed notification", the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Also in this case, in the "second left-handed notification" and "third left-handed notification", in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14, audio output is performed. The device 15 may include a process for outputting a sound prompting left-handed strike.

In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 by one ball, the main CPU 101a sends the first starting opening winning designation command to the production transmission data storage area (transmission) of the main RAM 101c in step S238. The buffer) is set, and in step S700, the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the sub CPU 102a.

Then, in the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 124, the process is performed in the flow of step S1802-12 → step S1802-13 → step S1802-14, and after that, three game balls pass through the winning gate 10. At that time, the process for "second left-handed notification" or "third left-handed notification" is performed.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have passed at the winning gate 10, the image display device 14 displays the second left-handed image 1622 or The third left-handed image 1632 is displayed, and thereafter, every time a second number (for example, one ball) of game balls smaller than the first number passes at the winning gate 10, the second left-handed image is displayed. 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is to be displayed.

However, once a ball entering the first starting port 6 is detected, the winning gate 3 ball passing flag "03G" is cleared in step S1802-14 of the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 124. Therefore, after that, the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is not displayed unless the first number of game balls pass at the winning gate 10.

Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, even if one game ball that the player accidentally fires toward the second game area passes through the winning gate 10, "left-handed". Since the display is not performed immediately, it is possible to avoid the troublesomeness of the player due to the "left-handed" display on the image display device 14. Therefore, since the "left-handed" display is displayed only when the player continuously fires a predetermined number of game balls toward the second game area, the effective "left" under more appropriate circumstances is displayed. "Strike" display can be performed. Then, in the state where the "left-handed" display is displayed, the "left-handed" display is terminated only when the entry of one game ball into the first starting port 6 is detected. Can continue the game without feeling stress.

In the fourth embodiment, after it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have passed at the winning gate 10, the ball entering the first starting port 6 is detected. As a result, although it is decided to clear the winning gate 3 ball passing flag "03G", when the winning balls to the 1st to 3rd general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3 are detected, The winning gate 3 ball passing flag "03G" may be cleared.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the above-described first embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 80, a state in which the game ball should be launched toward the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A (a state of a jackpot game, a high-accuracy time-short-game state, or a low-accuracy). In the time-saving game state), when it is detected that two game balls have entered at the first starting port 6, "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" is to be performed. ..

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the same game state (big hit game state, high probability time short game state or low probability time short game state), three game balls are played at the first starting port 6. When it is detected that the ball has passed, the "second right-handed notification" or the "third right-handed notification" is performed, and thereafter, unless the passage of the game ball at the winning gate 10 is detected, the first start is performed. Each time one game ball passes through the mouth 6, "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" is performed, which will be described below.

◇ (Right-handed display control process 3 in the fifth embodiment)
The right-handed display control process by the effect control board 102 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

Here, since steps S1702-1 to S1702-10 are the same as the processes of steps S1700-1 to S1700-10 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S1702-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered the first starting port 6, the process shifts to step S1702-12, and when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 6, step S1702-23. Move the process to.

In step S1702-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not three game balls have already been inserted at the first starting port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first start port 3-ball entry flag "03K" is set in the first start port 3-ball entry flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the first start port three-ball entry flag has been set, the process shifts to step S1702-16, and when it determines that the first start port three-ball entry flag has not been set, step S1702- The process is transferred to 13.

In step S1702-13, the sub CPU 102a adds "1" to the counter value of the first starting port entry number counter N to update the counter value, and shifts the process to step S1702-14.

In step S1702-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the first starting port entry number counter N is 3 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 3 or more, the right-handed display control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value of the first start port entry number counter N is 3 or more, step S1702-15 Move the process to.

In step S1702-15, the sub CPU 102a sets the first start port 3-ball entry flag “03K” in the first start port 3-ball entry flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

Here, since steps S1702-16 to S1702-22 are the same as the processes of steps S1700-16 to S1700-20 and steps S1700-11 to S1700-12 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. do.

In step S1702-23, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed at the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed at the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1702-24, and when it is determined that the game ball has not passed at the winning gate 10, the left-handed display control process ends. ..

In step S1702-24, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not three game balls have already been inserted at the first starting port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first start port 3-ball entry flag "03K" is set in the first start port 3-ball entry flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the first start port three-ball entry flag has been set, the process shifts to step S1702-25, and when it determines that the first start port three-ball entry flag has not been set, the sub CPU 102a strikes left. End the display control process.

In step S1702-25, the sub CPU 102a clears the first start port 3-ball entry flag "03K" stored in the first start port 3-ball entry flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and controls the left-handed display. End the process.

Hereinafter, steps S1702-26 to S1702-27 are the same as the processes of steps S1700-21 to S1700-22 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

From the above, in the fifth embodiment, in the game state (big hit game state, high probability time short game state or low probability time short game state) in which the game ball is launched toward the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A, 3 When the game ball for the ball enters the first starting port 6, the sub CPU 102a performs step S1702-11 → step S1702-12 → step S1702-13 → step S1702- in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126. Processing is performed in the flow of 14 → step S1702-15, and thereafter, based on the processing of steps S1702-16 to S1702-20, the second right-handed display start command or the third right is displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set the hit display start command.
Further, in step S1702-15, in order to memorize that the game balls for three balls have entered the first starting port 6, the first starting port of the sub RAM 102c is stored in the three-ball entering flag storage area. 1 start port 3 ball entry flag "03K" is set.

As a result, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and is transmitted by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. A "second right-handed notification" or a "third right-handed notification" that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A is performed. By this "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification", the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, in the "second right-handed notification" and the "third right-handed notification", in addition to displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 and the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14, the audio output device 15 May include a process for outputting a voice prompting left-handed stroke.

In this state, when one game ball enters the first starting port 6, the flow of step S1702-11 → step S1702-12 → step S1702-16 in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126. The second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c based on the process of steps S1702-15 to S1702-20.

Therefore, every time one game ball enters the first start port 6, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is sent to the lamp control board 104 and the lamp control board 104 in the data output process of step S1900. "Second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" or "third right-handed hit" transmitted to the image control board 105 and prompting the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to launch the game ball toward the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A. "Notification" is performed. By this "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification", the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Also in this case, in the "second right-handed notification" and "third right-handed notification", in addition to displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 and the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14, audio output is performed. The device 15 may include a process for outputting a sound prompting right-handed stroke.

In this state, when one game ball has passed at the winning gate 10, the main CPU 101a sets the winning gate passage designation command in the production transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c in step S256. , In step S700, the winning gate passage designation command is transmitted to the sub CPU 102a.

Then, in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126, the process is performed in the flow of step S1702-23 → step S1702-24 → step S1702-25, and after that, three game balls are used in the first starting port 6. At the time of entering the ball, the process for "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" is performed.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, when it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have been inserted in the first starting port 6, the image display device 14 has the second right. The hit image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed, and thereafter, a second number (for example, one ball) of game balls smaller than the first number is inserted at the first starting port 6. The second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed for each display.

However, once the passage of the game ball is detected at the winning gate 10, in step S1702-25 of the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126, the first starting port 3-ball entry flag "03K" is cleared. Therefore, after that, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is not displayed unless the first number of game balls are inserted at the first starting port 6.

Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, even if one game ball that the player accidentally fires toward the first game area is entered into the first starting port 6. Since the "right-handed" display is not immediately performed, it is possible to avoid the troublesomeness of the player due to the "right-handed" display being displayed on the image display device 14. Therefore, since the "right-handed" display is displayed only when the player continuously fires a predetermined number of game balls toward the first game area, the effective "right" under more appropriate circumstances is displayed. "Strike" display can be performed. Then, in the state where the "right-handed" display is displayed, the player is stressed because the "right-handed" display is terminated only when the passage of one game ball at the winning gate 10 is detected. You can continue the game without feeling.

In the fifth embodiment, after it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have been inserted in the first starting port 6, the game balls pass through the winning gate 10. By being detected, the first start opening 3 ball entry flag "03K" is cleared, but when the entry of the game ball into the 4th general winning opening 11-4 is detected, the second start is started. When the entry of the game ball in the mouth 7 is detected, the first start opening 3-ball entry flag “03K” may be cleared.

Further, in the present embodiment, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the time of receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the end of the effect time of the customer waiting effect are the same time value ( For example, it is 30 seconds), but the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the end of the effect time of the customer waiting effect may be shorter (for example, 10 seconds). Further, when the state after the power is restored is the customer waiting state, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect is set to a shorter time value (for example, 0 seconds) so that the customer waiting effect can be started early. good.

Further, as the customer waiting effect to be executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, for example, the above-mentioned demo display, the model name display for displaying the model name of the gaming machine Y, and the manufacturer name (manufacturer name) of the gaming machine Y are displayed. Any two or more of the maker display to be displayed and the warning display to display information for alerting the player (for example, "prohibition of playing under the age of 18", "prohibition of immersiveness", "prohibition of notification in the car of children", etc.) It may be a combination (in any order).

Further, when the customer waiting effect is executed by the combination of the demo display, the model name display, and the manufacturer display (in any order) on the image display device 14, the pseudo-correct light emission effect is executed while the manufacturer display is being executed, while the demo. During the execution of the display and the model name display, the pseudo-correct light emission effect may not be executed. In this way, the manufacturer name can be introduced gorgeously, and it is possible to improve the image of the manufacturer for the player.

Further, when the customer waiting effect is executed by the combination of the demo display, the model name display, and the manufacturer display (in any order) on the image display device 14, the pseudo-correct light emission effect is executed while the model name display is being executed. During the execution of the demo display and the maker display, the pseudo-correct light emission effect may not be executed. In this way, the model name can be introduced gorgeously, and it is possible to improve the image of the gaming machine for the player.

In addition, when the image display device 14 executes a customer waiting effect by combining a manufacturer display, a demo display, a model name display, and a warning display (in any order), a pseudo-correct light emission effect is performed during the execution of the model name display. On the other hand, the pseudo-correct light emission effect may not be executed during the execution of the maker display, the demo display, and the warning display. In this way, the model name can be introduced gorgeously, and it is possible to improve the image of the gaming machine for the player.

Further, when the image display device 14 executes the customer waiting effect in any three or more of the manufacturer display, the demo display, the model name display, and the warning display (in any order), the execution of any two display effects. While the pseudo-probable light emitting effect is executed during, the pseudo-probable light emitting effect may not be executed during the execution of the remaining display effect.

In addition, a specific character displayed on the image display device 14 during execution of the variation effect by a specific variation effect pattern or during execution of the correct display effect is displayed on the image display device 14 during the demo display, and is specified in the demo display. The pseudo-probable light emission effect may be executed while the character of is displayed.

Further, based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch provided in a place where the player cannot operate but the game clerk can operate, the normal mode which consumes normal power or the eco mode which consumes more power than the normal mode (customer) It is possible to switch to a mode in which the brightness of the lamp / LED is lower than the default brightness of the normal production mode during the waiting effect), and in the normal mode, the pseudo-correct light emission effect is executed during the customer waiting effect, while the eco mode is set. During the period, the pseudo-probable light emission effect may not be executed during the customer waiting effect.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine Y is used to generate a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state after the end of all jackpot games. However, when a jackpot game occurs due to the stop display of a specific jackpot special symbol, the jackpot game ends. Later, a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state are generated until the next jackpot game, while when a jackpot game is generated by the stop display of the normal jackpot special symbol, the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are set for a predetermined period (for example, 100 special times). The gaming machine Y may be generated over the variable display of the symbol).

In addition, when the game ball passes (wins) a specific area provided inside the big winning opening 8 in a specific round (for example, 8 rounds and 15 rounds) during the big hit game, a high-probability game state and a short-time game are performed after the big hit game is completed. While the state is generated over a predetermined period (for example, 120 times of variation display of the special symbol), if the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are set for a predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot game). The gaming machine Y may be generated over 100 times (variation display of special symbols).

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-228400), determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and stored as a hold memory. , When the start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the hold memory, and the variable display of the symbol is executed. When the result of the variable display becomes a special result, the special game is executed. In a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than in the gaming state, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than in the normal gaming state, and the judgment information is set before the start condition is satisfied. A pre-determination is performed, and a continuous advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the pre-determination, but there is a risk that the interest of the game may be reduced.

As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a game capable of executing a variable display of a symbol and executing a special game advantageous to the player when the variable display has a special result. In the machine, a hold storage means that stores determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game as a hold memory, a determination means that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the hold memory, and the above-mentioned Based on the determination result of the determination means, the variation display executing means for performing the variation display, the pre-determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means, and the pre-determination means. Based on the determination result, the continuous advance notice execution means for executing the continuous advance notice effect for performing a predetermined effect, the normal game state, and the specific game state in which the fluctuation time of the variation display is likely to be shorter than the normal game state are controlled. The continuous advance notice execution means is provided with a game state control means capable of performing the continuous advance notice effect at a higher rate in the specific game state than in the normal game state.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines such as gaming machine Y, but can also be used for jigyan ball gaming machines and arranged ball gaming machines.

Y game machine 6 1st start port 6a 1st start port detection sensor 7 2nd start port 7a 2nd start port detection sensor 8 Grand prize opening 10 Winning gate 14 Image display device 15 Audio output device 16 Production lighting device 70 2nd Start port control device 80 Grand prize opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b main ROM
101c main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b sub ROM
102c sub RAM
140 Display unit 141 1st hold icon display area 142 Changing icon display area 143 2nd hold icon display area

Claims (1)

Based on the determination information acquired when the start condition is satisfied, a special determination is made to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and when the result of the special determination becomes a special result, the special game In a game machine that can execute
A hold storage means for storing the determination information as hold storage, and a hold storage means.
A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Based on the result of the special determination, the effect control procedure for performing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is provided.
The effect control means
As the effect mode of the variation effect, it is possible to execute a normal mode and a specific mode in which the expectation of executing the special game is higher than that of the normal mode.
It is determined whether or not the specific mode is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination performed in response to the acquisition of the determination information.
Based on the result of the pre-determination, it is possible to execute a notice effect for performing a predetermined effect during the execution of the variation effect.
Before the execution of the specific mode, it is possible to execute a precursor effect suggesting that the specific mode is executed.
While the specific mode is being executed, it is possible to execute a specific mode notification effect for notifying that the specific mode is being executed.
Even when the specific mode is executed or not, the precursor effect can be executed.
The execution rate of the specific mode differs between the case where the game is controlled to the normal game state and the case where the game is controlled to the specific game state.
It is possible to execute a specific reach effect that is expected to execute the special game during the execution of the variable effect.
In the normal game state, the effect symbol can be displayed in the first display mode.
In the specific game state, the effect symbol can be displayed in the second display mode, which is less decorative than the first display mode.
Wherein in the normal running of the specific reach effect a gaming state, Ri displayable der the performance symbols in less decorative display mode than the first display form,
In the specific gaming state, the effect symbol can be displayed in the second display mode, which is less decorative than the first display mode.
The specific reach production is
Including the first specific reach effect and the second specific reach effect in which the expectation that the special game is executed is higher than that of the first specific reach effect.
The first notice effect executed in the specific game state displays a specific image corresponding to the effect symbol displayed in the second display mode, and the special game is performed depending on the type of the displayed specific image. It is the above-mentioned notice production that suggests the degree of expectation to be executed, and
The type of the specific image includes at least a first specific image and a second specific image.
When the specific image displayed corresponding to the effect symbol is the second specific image, the second specific reach effect can be executed.
The second advance notice effect executed in the normal game state suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by displaying the hold image displayed according to the hold memory in any of a plurality of types. It is a notice production,
The number of types of the reserved image is larger than the number of types of the specific image.
The case where the first specific reach effect is executed after the second notice effect is executed is more than the case where the first specific reach effect is executed without the second notice effect being executed. A gaming machine characterized by a high possibility of performing a special game.

Images